Vu PAK

Energy Upstream
Kingdom® 2017
VuPAK User Guide
July 2017
Trademarks and Copyright
This manual was produced by IHS Markit.
July 2017
.
1401 Enclave Pkwy Ste 500

Houston, Texas 77077
U.S.A.
Tel: (281) 531-4660
Fax: (832) 531-9966
Website: www.ihs.com/kingdom
Sales: [email protected]
Support: [email protected]
The following trademarks appear in this manual.
IHS Markit Kingdom® software and all of its components, AVOPAK, CGMPAK, GeoSyn®,
LoadPAK, PAKnotes®, Petra®, SynPAK®, Tunnel L+, Tunnel O, VelPAK®, VuPAK®,
Kingdom 1D Forward Modeling, Kingdom Colored Inversion, The Kingdom Company,
Kingdom Data Management, Kingdom DM Catalog Builder Kingdom Illuminator
Kingdom Seeker, and Kingdom I3D Scan are trademarks of IHS Markit.
Portions of data loading are copyrighted by Blue Marble Geographics.
Mapping API for the Spatial Explorer map provided by Esri ArcGIS Runtime SDK for .NET.
Kingdom Geophysics contains components under U.S. Patent Numbers 6,675,102,
8,265,876, and 9,105,075.
VuPAK® includes OpenInventor® and VolumeViz from FEI Visualization Sciences Group,
Inc. Some components or processes may be licensed under U.S. Patent Number 6,765,570.
Tunnel L+ includes OpenWorks® and SeisWorks® Development Kit from the Halliburton
Corporation.
Kingdom Connect and Tunnel O include OpenSpirit® FrameWork from OpenSpirit, a
TIBCO Software Group Company. Kingdom Data Management includes components from
OpenSpirit and are copyrighted by OpenSpirit, a TIBCO Software Group Company.
Kingdom Gateway plug-in for Petrel* E&P software platform uses the Ocean* software
development framework and * is a mark of Schlumberger.
Kingdom®1D Forward Modeling® includes software developed as part of the NPlot library
project available from: http://www.nplot.com/.
Portions of Kingdom® bitmap graphics are based on GD library by Boutell.Com, Inc. Further
information about the company can be found at www.boutell.com.
PAKnotes TIFF support is based in part on libtiff.
2017 Confidential iii

Rock Solid Attributes® is a registered trademark of Rock Solid Images Inc. and contains
confidential, proprietary, and trade secret information of Rock Solid Images Inc. Copyright©
Rock Solid Images Inc. All Rights reserved.
HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format 5) Software Library and Utilities Copyright 2006-2015 by
The HDF Group. NCSA HDF5 (Hierarchical Data Format 5) Software Library and Utilities
Copyright 1998-2006 by the Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois.
VelPAK and Seismic Inversion are developed by Equipoise Software Ltd on behalf of IHS
Markit.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Windows 7, Windows 8
operating systems, MS-DOS and SQL Server are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Oracle® Databases are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
OpenWorks, SeisWorks, Interpret 2000 and Interpret 2003 are registered trademarks of
Halliburton Corporation.
IHS Markit incorporates BMC® AppSight™ Black Box Technology in its software. BMC
Software, BMC Software logos and all other BMC Software product and service names are
registered trademarks or trademarks of BMC Software Inc. © 2009 BMC Software, Inc. All
rights reserved.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Notice
© 2011 - 2017 IHS Markit. For Internal use only. All rights reserved.
This manual contains confidential information and trade secrets proprietary to IHS Markit Ltd.
and its affiliated companies (“IHS Markit”). No portion of this manual may be reproduced,
reused, distributed, transmitted, transcribed or stored on any information retrieval system, or
translated into any foreign language or any computer language in any form or by any means
whatsoever without the express written permission of IHS Markit. For more information,
please contact Customer Care at [email protected].
Misuse Disclaimer
IHS Markit makes no representation or warranties of any kind (whether express or implied)
with respect to this manual or the Kingdom® software and to the extent permitted by law, IHS
Markit shall not be liable for any errors or omissions or any loss or damage or expense
incurred by an user. IHS Markit reserves the right to modify the Kingdom® software and any
of the associated user documentation at any time.
Acknowledgments
IHS Markit wishes to gratefully acknowledge the contributions of the many client software
testers in preparing the Kingdom® software. The enthusiastic Beta testers, smoke testers,
and staff greatly appreciate their invaluable feedback and contributions.
2017 Confidential
Table of Contents
VuPAK
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Geology in 3D
Creating and displaying cross sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Creating cross sections from the base map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Creating well-to-well cross sections in 3D space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Selecting cross sections as a data type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Displaying cross sections from vertical display windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Displaying surface intersections only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Changing cross section transparency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Moving cross sections in 3D space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rotating cross sections around a well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Moving cross sections along the scanning bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Microseismic Analysis
Key components of microseismic analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
VuPAK Microseismic console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Microseismic toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Loading point sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Select point set file and define header row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Select Frac and Reference Well(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Select the XY format and Z-Depth type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Select Date/Time input formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Specify stage attribute or enter value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Remove duplicates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Appending point sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Loading treatment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Appending treatment data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Validating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting point set(s) to display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting point sets for multiple point set display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Treatment Curves crossplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Viewing options for your point set(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Viewing your point set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Why Can’t I see my Microseismic point set? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting color and size for point set display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Point set calculations for interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Basic Math Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Coordinate correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Time-Depth curve (Z-Time Attribute) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. v

Borehole Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Horizon distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Extract data type from MSE Loci . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fracture Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Stimulated Rock Volumes (SRV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Graphical analysis tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2D Crossplot of attributes/curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Attribute histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Filtering data and creating subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Apply attribute filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manually cut and crop points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Managing point sets and subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Editing an existing subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Renaming a point set or subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Deleting a point set or subset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Calculating subset statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Displaying subset BFP and calculated volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Editing point set parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Well associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Change Axes for 3D crossplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Select point set attributes to display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Managing treatment curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring your Microseismic workspace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
3D crossplot display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2D crossplot formatting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Format crossplot Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
IHS Kingdom recommended format for Microseismic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Naming conventions for required fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Example format 1: Big_Oil_Co_Mywell_#4H_MSE.txt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Example format 2: Midsized_Oil_Co_BigGas_#1Lat_MSE.xlsx . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Visualization Menu
Selecting the VuPAK viewing area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatically reloading a moved view frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Data moving rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Defining project time/depth range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
View Menu
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Change VuPAK Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Display Options tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Traces tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Gathers tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
VuPAK Preferences tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Change the view of the VuPAK volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Set Orientation of VuPAK volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Stretch VuPAK Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
vi © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Manipulate the VuPAK volume in the Pick mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Manipulate the VuPAK volume using the Scanning Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Animate the VuPAK volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Move to a specific Frame during animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Manually change data types within scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Automatically change data types within scope during animation . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Change the Volume display mode from the Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Rotate the VuPAK volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Translate the VuPAK volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reset the Home View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Change center of rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Project Menu
Surveys Menu
Application settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Project cube annotation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Survey annotation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Display vertical seismic slices in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Select Seismic Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Displaying all 2D lines in the VuPAK working set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Selecting a horizontal slice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Displaying seismic object(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Display modes for seismic volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
SuperScope subvolumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Resetting SuperScope size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting SuperScopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Saving SuperScopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Renaming SuperScopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Deleting SuperScopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Volume rendering methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Surface attribute scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Opacity/Color Map
Histogram of the Amplitude Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Range of Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Color Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Opacity/Color map file menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Opacity control tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Set Minimum and Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Adjusting the Opacity Curve and Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Scrolling the Opacity Curve left or right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Make End Values Transparent to Isolate amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Expand Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Variable Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Culture Menu
© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. vii

Culture Display Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Wells Menu
Well Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Well Display Options - Display tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Well Display Options - Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Well Path Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Plan a New Wellbore Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Edit an Existing Wellbore Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Well Planner toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
New Borehole Name and UWI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Logs Menu
VuPAK Log Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Defining log scale and style setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Log shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Log Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Tops Menu
Setting formation top display properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Assigning formation top properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Editing Formation Tops in the 3D Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Faults Menu
Surface Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Change Transparency of All Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Fault Cut Management - Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Picking and editing fault cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Horizons Menu
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Picking Horizons in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Horizon Picking with Surface Hunt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Picking Parameters for SurfaceHunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Horizon Picking with Volume Hunt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Picking Parameters for Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Autopicking with the Flex Picker in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Other (Flex Picker) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Erase Horizons in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Display Horizon Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Horizon and Grid Display Resolution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Rendering Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Grids Menu
Displaying grid attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
viii © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Draping maps on surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Changing transparency of all grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Managing control points in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Picking control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Moving control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Deleting control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Selecting control points to delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Contours Menu
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tools Menu
Video Capture in VuPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Video Capture Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Record an AVI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
View an AVI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Change the Recording Properties of an AVI File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Using the Volume Slice Scanning Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Slice Animation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chair-cut Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Volume Animation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Oblique Cut Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Oblique Plane Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Rotate View about Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Material Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Material Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Material Property Color Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Stereo Mode With 3D Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Supported Stereo views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Crossplot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Headlight Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Directional Light Color Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Sliders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
OpenInventor ToolKit
Advanced Inventor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Draw Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Viewing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Change Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Right-Mouse Button Menus

Horizon RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fault RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Grid RMB menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. ix

Well RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Seismic Section RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Select Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Scanning Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Cross Section RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Seismic Volume RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Select Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Data Type Coblending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Gather Crossline RMB Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
VuPAK Toolbars
Survey Cube Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Seismic Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
VuPAK - Viewing Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Utilities Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Animation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Video Capture Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Decoration Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Thumbwheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Use Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Display a Toolbar From the View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Close a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Undock a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Dock a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
x © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Kingdom® 2017
VuPAK: 3D Visualization
Overview
VuPAK is an interactive 3D-visualization tool designed to better visualize the 3D relationships
that exist among different types of data. Culture data, horizon and grid surfaces, fault
surfaces, base maps, well paths and well log curves can be displayed, along with 2D
geologic and seismic sections in the forms of vertical or horizontal slices, and finally 3D
seismic volumes.
The VuPAK main menu includes the following. See also Related topics below the menu
overview table:
Visualization Define the areal extents of the viewing area and the vertical bounds
in time or depth. This menu also includes Print options.
View Modify VuPAK display settings, zoom, control orientation,

exaggeration, projection, and scale of viewing area.
Project Set VuPAK Preferences. The Project Menu options accessed from
the Kingdom workspace are also available.
Surveys Manage and annotate surveys; select lines and slices; load, unload,
and display volumes; adjust opacity; and control the volume scope
and rendering strategy.
Culture Manage and display culture data.
Wells Select, query, and edit wells.
Logs Select and scale logs.
Tops Manage, activate, and edit formation tops.
Faults Manage fault surfaces and fault cuts, and activate fault surfaces.
Horizons Manage, activate, and set picking parameters for, and displays
attributes for horizons.
Grids Manage and display attributes for grids.
Contours Manage contours.
Tools Capture VuPAK images, animate them, and edit the lighting.
Tip: With a horizon, fault, or grid displayed on the Kingdom base map or in a VSD, you can
also right-click the displayed object and select View <object> in VuPAK. VuPAK will
launch with the selected object displayed in the workspace.
You can also right-click and select to display the nearest line, inline or crossline in
VuPAK from the base map or VSD.
Related topics
Geology in 3D
Opacity/Color Map
VuPAK Toolbars
VuPAK Keyboard Shortcuts
2 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Geology in 3D
Viewing geologic structures in 3D space can significantly enhance the geoscientist’s ability to
identify and understand these structures and any potential hydrocarbon trends. For
geoscientists, who traditionally work in map and section views, viewing geologic sections or
more complex fence diagrams in an integrated 3D workspace alongside well data and
interpretation surfaces provides a powerful tool to visually correlate and understand the data.
VuPAK supports the integrated display of both cross sections and seismic sections, and
provides tools to create lithology models based on the unit fill between grids, faults, and
horizons. These models can assist with initial well planning design, specifically in areas
where no seismic data is provided. The ability to easily manipulate cross sections spatially
and see the 3D display update dynamically optimizes geological model reconnaissance and
data quality control. In addition, the integration of seismic data through the map update
features of Dynamic Depth Conversion provide more tools to ensure a real time, accurate
view of your data.
Working with cross sections

Kingdom’s geology capability includes creating, displaying, and moving cross sections in 3D
space. You can also display lithology models on cross sections through wells with a single
button click.
Creating and displaying cross sections
Moving cross sections in 3D space
Selecting cross sections as a data type
Working with unit fill models

VuPAK unit fill models provide tools to create and display lithology models within the 3D
workspace. A unit fill model fills the space between geologic layers with a selected fill color
and lithology pattern. You can specify the geologic layers, fill colors, and lithology patterns
manually or you can display the automatic model created from the horizons, grids, and faults
in the VuPAK working set. Only manual unit fill models display lithology pattern. Unit fill
models also show the intersection of grids, horizons, and faults with cross sections and
seismic sections in time or depth.
Working with Manual Unit Fill Models
Displaying Automatic Unit Fill Models
Note: Unit Fill Models are not supported on the old fault system. To see if you are using the
old fault system, click User Preferences from the IHS Kingdom Start Page, not from
within a project. Select the Fault System tab. See also Kingdom Fault Systems.
Using control points in the 3D workspace

A control point set is a set of digitized or imported points with XY or XYZ coordinates. Control
points can be digitized on a vertical display in depth (XYZ), on the base map (XY), and in
VuPAK (XYZ). After digitizing or importing, control points are saved to the project database.
© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 3

When digitizing control points in VuPAK, you can only create control points in depth on the
following objects: vertical sections, time/depth slices, faults, grids, wells, horizons, and 3D
seismic volumes on all faces and in all animation modes including isolated voxels.
All control point functionality, visualizing, creating, editing, is supported in the 3D workspace
in VuPAK as well as an additional option to Delete Control Points by Lasso.
This delete option is available from the too bar and from the right mouse button menu
when the control point set has been set active for picking.
Flattening on surfaces
Flatten surfaces and well-related objects relative to a horizon or grid in time or depth domain.
The interpreted object acts as the temporary datum and displays at a z value of 0. Other
horizons, grids, boreholes, formation tops, fault cuts, and log curves reposition relative to the
flattened surface. Flattening is temporary and is not saved in the database.
The surface cannot contain null values. Also, all surfaces must have the same extents.
To flatten on a surface:
1. Right-click on the surface you want to be the temporary datum and select Flatten.
All well-related objects are repositioned relative to the flattened surface.
2. To unflatten, press U on the keyboard.
Note: Picking tops, fault cuts, and control points is supported in a flattened view.
Related topics
Control Point Set Management
Dynamic Depth Conversion
Geosteering
Illustrated Scenarios of Common Geologic Conditions


Kingdom provides several ways to create cross sections. You can create cross sections
through wells in the 3D workspace, or by multiple ways from the Kingdom base map.
Creating cross sections from the base map
Creating well-to-well cross sections in 3D space
Displaying cross sections from vertical display windows

Kingdom provides multiple ways to digitize a cross section on the Kingdom base map. All
cross sections can be displayed in the 3D workspace. To digitize on the base map when in
the 3D workspace, right-click and select Digitize Cross Section Through Wells on Base
Map.
For more information about creating geologic sections in the Kingdom base map, see
Geologic Sections.
Note: Correlation sections display as cross sections in 3D based on true distance spacing.
Related topics

To create a cross section between wells in the VuPAK workspace:
3. Click the Digitize Cross Sections Through Wells button on the VuPAK Geologic
Modeling tool bar (or right click in the VuPAK workspace and click Digitize Cross
Section Through Wells).
In the VuPAK workspace, the cursor changes to a cross-hair with an L in the upper right
quadrant .
4. Click on the first well you want in the cross section, which becomes highlighted with an
orange dashed line.
5. Click on any additional wells you want to include in the cross section. The wells remain
highlighted in orange until you finish digitizing.
When digitizing you can press the Escape key to undo the previous segment of a cross
section.
6. Double-click on the last well to finish digitizing. The cross section is also visible on the
base map, but not in a VSD.

Tip: To distinguish cross sections you digitize in VuPAK from those you digitize on the base
map, you can change the line color of the VuPAK cross sections in User Preferences:
Project > User Preferences > Colors. You must also have the VuPAK Line Overlay
option selected in the base map settings: View > Settings.
Tip: To create a single well cross section, right-click the well in the 3D workspace and select
Display Single Well Section.
Related topics

Cross sections are available as an additional option in all data type selection locations. For
example:
• Right-click on a 2D line, inline or crossline on the base map and select Display <line
name> in VuPAK to open the Select Data Type dialog box.
• In VuPAK click the Select a Seismic Line icon in the left tool bar to open the Select
Vertical Display dialog box.
• In VuPAK, right-click on a vertical section > Select Vertical Display.
Displaying cross sections from vertical display windows

To display a cross section in 3D, right click on the section in the vertical display window and
then click either Display Current Line in VuPAK with Wells or Display Current Line in
VuPAK without Wells. The current line displays as a semi-transparent vertical surface. If you
choose the option to display the section with wells, all the wells that are shown in the section
also display.
Note: Performance Considerations: If you want to create large regional cross sections, you
may want to select the Display Current Line in VuPAK without Wells. Performance will
depend on your hardware and number of wells in the section.
Correlation sections display as cross sections in 3D based on true distance spacing.

A correlation section by line on the The correlation section displays as a

base map. The 4 wells are projected cross section through wells in VuPAK.
onto the line and displayed in a vertical
By Line
The figure below is of the same cross section on the base map:
If you want to synchronize 2D and 3D displays of cross sections go to theVuPAK Preferences

tab and select Vertical Sections.
To turn off the display of a section, right click on the section and click either Unload or
Unload with Wells, depending on the option you want. If you select Unload with Wells, this
removes both the section and any intersecting wells from the VuPAK volume. Any other wells
remain visible.
Displaying surface intersections only

By default VuPAK displays a three dimensional representation of horizons, grids, and faults.
You can also display the intersections only of all surfaces with both cross sections and
seismic sections.

To select which surface intersections you want to display, click on the VuPAK
Geologic Modeling tool bar, and then select the surface type(s). To display only intersections
for all surface types, select the Display Intersections Only option. These options are also
available from the right mouse menu.
Related topics
Display vertical seismic slices in VuPAK
VuPAK Preferences tab
Changing cross section transparency

To change the transparency of a section, right-click on the cross section and then click
Change Transparency. You can change the transparency of the selected section or apply
the transparency setting to all sections visible in the VuPAK workspace by selecting Apply to
all cross-sections.
You can also change transparency from the right-click menu on any object displayed in
VuPAK. If the section is completely transparent, the Change Transparency option is still
available from a right-click on the section.
Note: [IRINA] Cross section transparency and seismic section transparency settings are
separate. If a cross section goes through wells that are both outside of and inside of a
seismic survey.
Related topics
Displaying surface intersections only


With cross sections through wells you can rotate the section around a selected well. For all
cross sections including sections with projected wells you can move the section along the
scanning bar in 3D space using the control key when in select (arrow) mode. In both cases, a
reset option is available from the right-click menu on the section.
Rotating cross sections around a well
Moving cross sections along the scanning bar
Rotating cross sections around a well

With a cross section through wells displayed in the 3D workspace:
1. Click on any well that intersects the cross section to highlight the well with a dashed red
line.
2. Click and hold on the cross-section, which becomes outlined in yellow.
3. Drag the cursor to rotate the cross section around the highlighted well.
To restore a cross section to its original position, right-click on the cross section surface and
then click Reset Section Position.
By default, sections through wells rotate around a well’s surface location. To rotate a section
for a deviated well around the bottom hole location, press Shift+Click and then drag the
section around the bottom hole location.
Once you rotate a cross section around a well, it no longer intersects any other wells in the
original cross section. This means you cannot rotate the cross section around a different well
in the section until you restore the cross section to its original position.
Tip: If the section snaps back to the original position after you rotate it, you have loaded a
correlation section into the 3D workspace. Unload the correlation section. Then return to
the base map and digitize a cross section, or digitize the cross section directly in
VuPAK.
Related topics

In addition to rotating a section around a well, you can move the cross section along the
scanning bar. The angle of the scanning bar plane depends on how you displayed the bar,
from the right-click menu or from the keyboard shortcut Ctrl.
1. Create the cross section on the base map or in VuPAK.
2. If you created the cross section from the base map, right click on the vertical section and
select Display Current Line in VuPAK (with or without wells).


Note: This feature requires both a Kingdom Advanced and a VuPAK license.When
Microseismic is launched from Surveys > Microseismic in the Kingdom main menu, a
VuPAK license is checked out even if VuPAK is not open. Launching VuPAK after
Microseismic is open will not require a new VuPAK license.
The VuPAK Microseismic feature provides the necessary tools to import, view, display, and
analyze microseismic data in an integrated interpretation environment. Dynamic filtering and
sub-setting of the microseismic point sets in a 3D crossplot allows you to isolate lineations
and define fracture patterns resulting from reservoir treatments, and consequently optimize
and enhance recovery operations.
This section contains the following topics:
• Key components of microseismic analysis
• VuPAK Microseismic console
• Microseismic toolbar
Tip: To improve performance when launching Microseismic or loading data, turn off the 3D
Crossplot view. Your VuPAK workspace gives you the same view in the context of the
project bounds.

Key components of microseismic analysis
The MicroSeismic console is opened from Surveys > Microseismic from either the Kingdom
or VuPAK. The following topics will take you from loading your data to analyzing the
microseismic events and running subset calculations:
Loading point sets The data loader provides the flexibility to load multiple file formats.
See also IHS Kingdom recommended format for Microseismic data.
Loading treatment data Load data from the hydraulic fracture treatments that correspond to
the microseismic events. The point set data and treatment data save
as a single data file.
Validating data View the loaded (and calculated) point set attribute data in columnar
format. You can also export these numeric values to an Excel
spreadsheet.
Selecting point set(s) to Select single or multiple point sets to display on the selected views:
display VuPAK, 3D Crossplot, base map, and VSD.
Editing point set Parameters for each point set include the associated wells (frac and
parameters reference), the axes assignment (defaults to X, Y, and Z-Depth or Z-
Time), and the 3D attributes to display (both loaded and calculated).
Graphical analysis View and analyze single or multiple point sets in the selected views
tools with the following tools:
Treatment Curves crossplot
2D Crossplot of attributes/curves
Attribute histogram
Point set calculations Run calculations on your point set and create an associated attribute.
for interpretation Multiple calculations are available including Z-time based on a TD
chart, point set distance from the borehole, point set distance from a
specified horizon, data type extraction, fracture velocity, and
stimulated rock volume.
Filtering data and Apply attribute filters (including the treatment data) to the point set to
creating subsets group and select points to subset. Cut or crop selected points to
further define your subsets.
Calculating subset For a single point set, run selected calculations on available subsets.
statistics The calculated values are displayed in a spreadsheet which can then
be exported to Microsoft Excel 2007 or later.
Configuring your Select highlight and background colors for the 3D Crossplot and
Microseismic format settings for the 2D Crossplot.General Settings and Options.
workspace

VuPAK Microseismic console
The main components of the Microseismic console, or workspace, are the Microseismic
toolbar, the list of selected or available point sets (and associated subsets), and the
workspace for the selected tab.
Point Set Display (Single or Multiple)—when in single display mode, all available point sets
are listed. With a single point set selected, that point set’s subsets are displayed below. In
Multiple display mode, displayed point sets are listed. The subsets for the selected point set
being analyzed are listed below.
Available tabs for point set analysis and interpretation are as follows:
Tab Workflows
3D Attributes Specify display properties for 3D point set attributes, and filter to create
subsets:
• Selecting color and size for point set display
• Filtering data and creating subsets

Treatment Curves Plot treatment curves and point set attributes together on the same
crossplot to analyze the effect of the frac treatments on the reservoir.
Calculations Run calculations on the point set data for analysis. The following
calculations are available: basic math, coordinate correction, T-D curve
for Z attribute in time, borehole distance, horizon distance, extract data
type from MSE loci, fracture velocity, and simulated rock volumes.
Parameters Check or set parameters before you begin analysis. Some attributes
are defined during loading. Parameters include the frac and reference
wells, attributes for the axes of the 3D crossplot, point set attributes to
display, and treatment curve management.
Data View columnar point set attribute data (loaded and calculated). The
data grid can be exported to an Excel spreadsheet.

Microseismic toolbar
Table 1
1 Load Point Sets The point set file formats supported by Kingdom are
Microsoft Excel and a variety of ASCII files in
columnar format.
2 Append Point Sets The append file must have the same format as the
original file.
3 Load Treatment Data Point set data must be loaded before treatment data.
4 Append Treatment Data The append file must have the same format as the
original file.
5 Save point subset Subsets are created by filtering data and by manually
selecting points using cut and crop tools.
6 Views Select which views to display the points sets (VuPAK,

base map, VSD, and 3D Crossplot)
7 Selection Mode Turn on and off manual selection mode.
8 Calculate Subset Available calculations include best fit plane, bounding

Statistics box, shrink wrap, point volume, and attribute min/max.
9 2D Crossplot The 2D Crossplot plots any 2 attributes, loaded or

calculated, on a generic crossplot.
10 Histogram Create a histogram for any point set, subset, or

treatment curve.
11 Refresh Working Sets Refresh the wells, horizons, and surveys.
12 Display Options Select highlight color; crossplot background; VSD

corridor width
13 Minimize Minimize the Microseismic window to display the Mini

Toolbar only.

Table 1
14 Help. Open the Microseismic Help file.
Mini toolbar
The Mini Toolbar makes your main Microseismic tools available while working in the VuPAK
3D workspace or one of the Kingdom views. To minimize your Microseismic window, click the
minimize icon - number 13 in the Microseismic toolbar above.

Loading point sets
Loading point sets

Point set data, or microseismic event data, is derived from the seismic records of
microseismic activity resulting from a well fracture treatment (frac job), or from the settling of
a rock formation as fluids are removed from the reservoir. The seismic records are processed
to get the various attributes that each contractor generates for each point. The resulting data
is a 3D point set file.
The required fields to load the point set data are date, time, the event loci (the XYZ location of
the events), and the corresponding stage for the events. Point set file formats and data fields
vary among contractors. The formats supported by Kingdom are Microsoft Excel and a
variety of ASCII files in columnar format.
Note: Microsoft Excel files must be *.xlsx format available with Microsoft Office 2007 or later.
Earlier versions (*.xls) are not supported.
Each field must be contained within a single column. Multiple columns for a single
field is not supported.
Tip: To improve performance when launching Microseismic or loading /switching point set
data, turn off the 3D Crossplot from the Select Views icon in Microseismic toolbar. Your
VuPAK workspace gives you the same view in the project bounds context.
Once loaded, the 3D point sets are viewed in project space with the related well bores and
perforation information. See Figure 1 below.
1. Select point set file and define header row.
Click the load icon in the tool bar and browse to the point set file. Once selected, the
loader will open with the first 10 rows of the file displayed with the header row highlighted.
If the highlighted row is not the header row, click on the header row to highlight.
2. Select Frac and Reference Well(s).
After the header row is located, select the frac well and the reference well (if different from
the frac well). The well information will be displayed at the bottom of the Loading dialog.
3. Select the XY format and Z-Depth type.
Specify if the XY coordinates of the microseismic event loci are project XY’s or are in
Northing and Easting values from the reference well XY location. Then specify if the
depth values in the input file are in TVD or subsea.
4. Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations.
If the columns for XY and Z are recognized in the header row, these attributes will be pre-
selected. If not, select the attributes that correspond to the XY and Z fields. Once
selected, all necessary calculations will be made to the first row of data. The loader will
display the calculated value for each and will create a default new attribute name. The Z
values will be corrected to the seismic datum elevation. Northing and Easting values will
be corrected to the Project XY locations. If the XY values are already in the Project XY’s,
no calculation is required for these two treatment curves.

Loading point sets
5. Select Date/Time input formats.

Date and time can be input as one field or two. Specify if the Timestamp is 1 or 2
columns. Then select the date and time attribute(s) and format. The selected format will
be applied to the first row of data for confirmation.
6. Specify stage attribute or enter value.
Stage can be a column or can be included in the file name or in the file, but as a single
field, not as a column. If Stage is a column, the attribute should be pre-selected. If there is
no attribute for Stage, select User defined as the Stage format, and then enter the stage
in the Value field.
7. Remove duplicates.
Check to remove duplicate values which can substantially improve loading performance.
8. Enter a name for the point set and click OK.
The default name is the file name. You cannot overwrite point sets. If a point set with the
same name already exists, you will have to change to the name to save.
9. Open the Data tab to Validate your data.
Tip: Once loaded, the point set will be displayed in all views: VuPAK workspace, base map,
vertical displays. To optimize performance, the Microseismic 3D Crossplot is turned off.
See Viewing your point set.

Loading point sets
When your point set data is loaded, you have multiple analysis options. See the following:
• Graphical analysis tools
• Point set calculations for interpretation

Loading point sets
Select point set file and define header row

Note: Point set data must be loaded before treatment data. Both sets of data are saved as a
single data file under the name given for the point set.
1. Click the Load Point Set icon on the Microseismic toolbar.

2. Browse to and select the desired data file, and click Open. See Supported file formats.
3. The data loader will display the File path to the point set file you selected and the first ten
rows of the file. If the correct file is not displayed, click Browse and navigate to a different
file.
4. In the data loader, select the header row if it is not already selected.
In the figure below, the header is row is the first row.
5. The grid below the text file display has the headers and data columns aligned. Review the
point set data. Required fields (attributes) are X, Y, Z (Depth), Time/Date, and Stage.
6. Move down the loader and Select Frac and Reference Well(s).

Loading point sets
Supported file formats

Each contractor has their own point set file format and file extension. As long as the data is
columnar, Kingdom will display all fields (attributes) giving you maximum flexibility. In addition
to date, time, location, stage, and magnitude, common fields include confidence, signal/noise
ratio (SNR), stress, inclination and shear azimuth.
Note: Location can be given in actual XYZ coordinates along the reference well, or as
northing and easting values from the reference well. Coordinate correction to project
XYZ from easting and northing and datum adjustments are done during loading.
Note: Some file formats include the stage information in the file name or in a row above the
header row. If you do not have a data column for stage, you will be given the option to
specify a user defined timestamp.
Kingdom supports the following columnar file formats for point set data:
• Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet (*.xlsx)—Microsoft Office versions 2007 and later.
• The following ASCII file formats:
- Text File (*.txt) —each data field (column) is separated by a delimiter. Comma, tab,
and semicolon delimited files are supported. Space delimited files are supported
ONLY IF space is the defined delimiter. If a column header name has a space, for
example Time Stamp, the file will not be read correctly.
- CSV File (*.csv)—comma delimited file.
Note: Fixed width columnar files are not supported.
Select Frac and Reference Well(s)

After you Select point set file and define header row, select the frac and reference wells for
the point set.
• Frac well—the well used to apply the hydraulic fracturing treatment to the rock formation.
• Borehole—the frac well borehole that applied the treatment. the active deviation survey
for the borehole is displayed once the borehole is selected.
• Reference well—if the microseismic events are being monitored with respect to a central
reference well rather than the frac well, select the reference well.

Loading point sets
1. Click Select beside Frac well. All wells in the Kingdom working set will be listed. If the
frac or reference well is not listed, return to the Kingdom Project Tree and make sure it is
turned on.
Note: Your working set of wells is determined by the wells turned on in your Kingdom
Project Tree or Work Tree, not the VuPAK Project Tree.
To narrow your list, enter a search term in the search field. The list will dynamically update
to include only the wells that contain the entered string.
2. If the frac well is not also the reference well, uncheck Use frac well. Then click Select
beside Reference well and select the well from the list. The default is to use the frac well
as the reference well.
3. Once the reference well is selected, the reference well datum and XY coordinates of that
well are read from the database and displayed at the bottom of the loader. The seismic
datum elevation of the Kingdom project is also displayed.
This information is not editable in this interface. It is used to calculate the Z-Depth values and
Project XY values.
Note: Project XY calculations are only required if the location coordinates in the point set file
were Northing and Easting values from the reference well.
Note: After the data is loaded, you can access this information from the Parameters tab in
the Microseismic Console. Click Associations on the left to view the frac and
reference well and associated parameters. See Editing point set parameters for an
overview of other parameter tabs.
Once the header row has been identified and the well information has been selected, the
application will use the header row information to complete the XYZ, Timestamp, and Stage
information.
If the attributes are recognized, all attribute fields will be preselected and completed. and the
OK button will be active. Review each field and click OK to load the data.

Loading point sets
For attributes that are not recognized, you will need to complete all or some of the following
steps:
• Select the XY format and Z-Depth type
• Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations
• Select Date/Time input formats
• Specify stage attribute or enter value
Select the XY format and Z-Depth type

After you Select Frac and Reference Well(s), select the XY format and Z-Depth type.
• XY format—the location of your microseismic event loci can be in one of 3 formats:
Project XY’s, Dx-Easting (Dy-Northing), or Latitude/Longitude. If the XY columns in the
input file are recognized, the format will be selected.
• Z-Depth type—options are TVD and Subsea. The calculated Z-Depth attribute is always
TVD. If your depth type is subsea, Microseismic will convert to TVD.
Note: Before any attributes can be recognized and pre-selected, you must specify which
row is the Header row.
When all attributes are recognized, the OK button will be active. Review each field and click
OK to load the data.
steps:
• Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations
Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations

If your Z attribute and the point set location attributes (XY, Easting/Northing, or Lat Long) are
recognized, they will be pre-selected. If these attributes are not recognized, then click the
down arrow beside each and select the corresponding attribute.
For example, if your X attribute is labeled MS_LOC_X, it may not be recognized. Click the
down arrow beside X and select MS_LOC_X from the list.
After you select or accept the attributes, calculations will be made to your first row of data The
calculated result and new attribute name will be displayed beside each attribute.
• Z-Depth calculation

Loading point sets
• Case 1: XY format is project XY’s

• Case 2: XY format is Dx-Easting
• Case 3: XY format is Lat Long
Note: After the data is loaded, you can access this information from the Parameters tab
in the Microseismic Console. Click Axes on the left to view or change the
attributes assigned to each axis. See Editing point set parameters for an overview
of other parameter tabs.
When all attributes are recognized, the OK button will be active. Review each field and click
OK to load the data.
steps:
Z-Depth calculation
The depth value of microseismic event loci is usually recorded as the depth from the
elevation reference of the frac/reference well: (kelly bushing, ground level, or derrick floor).
Unless the elevation of the reference well equals the seismic datum elevation, a project Z-
Depth value will need to be calculated.
Microseismic converts (if necessary) and stores all depth values as TVD. If the Z attribute in
the input data is in subsea, Microseismic will convert the values to TVD using the input
reference well datum and the project seismic datum elevation. A new Z-Depth attribute will be
created.
The calculations are as follows:
Depth Type Calculated Z-Depth for each MS Event
TVD (Seismic Datum — Reference Well Elevation) + Z Attribute Value
Subsea Seismic Datum — Z Attribute Value

Loading point sets
Note: If you have a time-depth curve for the frac well, you will also be able to calculate the
Z-Time attribute with a selected T-D Curve. See Time-Depth curve (Z-Time Attribute).
You will then be able to view your microseismic data in both time and depth displays
in Kingdom and VuPAK.
For an overview of all cases, see Select XYZ attributes and confirm calculations.
Case 1: XY format is project XY’s

The simplest case is when the XY data in the input file is in the Project XY coordinates.

Loading point sets
No calculations or conversions are necessary. the New attribute name fields beside X and Y
will be blank as no new attribute needs to be calculated.
Case 2: XY format is Dx-Easting

If the XY locations in your microseismic point set data are given as Easting and Northing
values from the reference well, calculations will be required to convert the coordinates in the
data file to your Kingdom project XY coordinates.
Examine the first 10 rows of the file. Typical field names for event loci recorded as a distance
from a reference well are Easting (DX) and Northing (DY).
Again, if these attributes are recognized, they will be pre-selected.

Loading point sets
For each event, Kingdom will add the X coordinate of the reference well to the Easting value,
and the Y coordinate to the Northing value. The default names of the new attributes are X
and Y. However, these fields are editable.
Case 3: XY format is Lat Long

If the location values in your microseismic point set data are given as Latitude and Longitude,
calculations will be required to convert the Lat Long values in the data file to your Kingdom
project XY coordinates.
Examine the first 10 rows of the file for the header row. If the names for latitude and longitude
attributes are recognized, they will be pre-selected.
For each event, Kingdom will convert the latitude and longitude values to the project XY’s.
The default names of the new attributes are X and Y. However, these fields are editable.

Loading point sets
Select Date/Time input formats

See Loading point sets or Loading treatment data for the previous steps. Note that the
process for selecting the Date/Time formats is the same for both point set data and treatment
data.
Each microseismic event in your point set file (or record in your treatment data file) has a
corresponding timestamp. If the header row has been located by entering the number of rows
to skip, and the date and time field(s) are recognized, the timestamp format, attributes, and
pattern will all be pre-selected.
The following text fields will be displayed to allow you to confirm the format information:
• Input data—the timestamp value in the first row of data.
• Applied data—the timestamp value in the first row of data with the selected pattern
applied.
The date in the applied data field displayed in 05 Jan 2010 format allows you to confirm
that the correct pattern has been selected - particularly in the case where the first 2
numbers of the date are under 12. In this case, the default US pattern, month/day/year is
assumed. If the date pattern is day/month/year, click the down arrow and make this
selection. Then confirm in the Applied data field. Using 01:05:2010 as an example, with
the day/month/year pattern applied, the date will be 01 May 2010.

Loading point sets
If the timestamp attributes are not recognized, you will need to select the following:
1. Timestamp format— the date and time can be one of three formats:
- 1 column—the date and time are combined into one column.
- 2 columns—the date and time are in two separate columns.
- User defined—the start date and time information is not in a column. See User define
timestamp.
2. Date and Time Attribute(s)—if the single column date/time attribute or separate date
and time attributes are not pre-selected, click the down arrow beside each and select the
corresponding attribute from the list.
3. Date Pattern (format)—the date pattern can be one of four formats:
- Month-Day-Year—the default pattern in the United States
- Day-Month-Year
- Year-Month-Day
- Year-Day-Month

Loading point sets
Most common delimiters are supported: forward slash; colon; comma; space; hyphen.
The application will read the date and make an intelligent guess for the pattern. If the first
2 numbers are equal to or less than 12, then the default US pattern, month/day/year is
assumed. If the date pattern is day/month/year, click the down arrow and make this
selection.The selected date pattern will be applied to the date in the first row and will be
displayed in 05 Jan 2010 format for confirmation.
For a pattern beginning with the year, if the last 2 numbers are equal to or less than 12,
the year-Month-Day pattern will be applied.
The next step is to Specify stage attribute or enter value.
User define timestamp

A user define timestamp means that the date and time are not columns in the file. Instead the
start date and start time are elsewhere, typically in the file name, or as a single field in the file,
usually above the header row. In this case time is measured by adding an increasing counter
of a specified number of minutes or seconds to the start date and time.
The increment can be a constant value that you enter (such as 1 minute) or it can be a
column in the file. If the increment is a column, then the value does not need to be a constant
value.
Increment is a single value and is not

Increment is a column in the data file.
a column in the data. Enter the
Click the down arrow and select the
increment value and select minutes or
attribute that contains the increment
seconds.
value in minutes or seconds.
• Date and Time—manually enter the start date and time in the respective fields. Note that
they must be entered in the format displayed:
- Date = Month/Day/Year. The order (pattern) is important, but most formats are
recognized.
- Time = Hour:Minute:Second using a 24 hour clock (2:00 PM is entered as 14:00)
Once the start date/time, increment, and time unit are entered, a Timestamp attribute will be
calculated.
• Increment—select if the increment is 1 column, or is user defined.

Loading point sets
- I column—click the down arrow beside Value and select the column that contains the
increment information. Then select Minutes or Seconds.
- User defined—enter the increment value in the text box and select Minutes or
Seconds.
Specify stage attribute or enter value

Specifying the Stage attribute is the last step in loading point set data. See Loading point sets
for the previous steps.
Each microseismic event is associated with a frac stage. The stage is included in the point
set file in one of two formats:
• Stage is a 1 column attribute—a single stage or multiple stages is a single column of
data - generally labeled Stage. If the attribute is recognized in the data, it will be pre-
selected.
• Stage is user defined—a single stage number for the file is included in the file name, or
as a single field in the file. The file does not contain a column of data for Stage.
1. If the Stage is a 1column attribute and the attribute is not pre-selected, click the down
arrow beside Value and select the attribute from the list.
If the Stage is user defined, manually enter the number in the Value field.
2. Name—enter a name for the point set and click OK. The default name is the file name.
You cannot overwrite point sets. If a point set with the same name already exists, you will
have to change to the name to save.
3. When your point set data is loaded, you can Loading treatment data and begin your
analysis. You may also want to run Point set calculations for interpretation such as Z-
Time using a specified T-D chart.
4. As you acquire more data, you can Appending point sets and Appending treatment data
without losing the set parameters. In addition, calculations for any new attributes will
automatically be applied to the appended data.
Remove duplicates
Click the checkbox to select the Remove Duplicates option. This option removes duplicate
points from the pointset, based on the timestamp, to improve performance when analyzing
the point sets after they have been loaded. This process can significantly increase the
loading time but is still recommended.

Loading point sets
Note: You can also select to remove duplicates after the point set is loaded. On the Data
tab, click Remove Duplicates in the bottom left.
Appending point sets

Previous step:
Loading point sets.
The append file must have the same format as the original file. The loader will read the file
and populate the fields in the data loader.
1. Click the Append Point Set icon in the Microseismic toolbar.
2. Browse to and select the desired data file, and click Open.
All fields in the Data Loader are populated except any User defined Timestamp fields
that require manual input. See Select Date/Time input formats
Note: The primary fields in the point set data are date and time. The date and time on
the append file should be after the date and time in the existing file.
3. Enter User defined timestamp data if required.

4. Click OK to append the data. The display in the 3D Crossplot and all views will
dynamically update. See Viewing your point set.
5. Click the Data tab to validate your data.
Note: As you append your existing point set with new data, calculations for any new
attributes will automatically be applied to the appended data.

Loading treatment data

Treatment data refers to the data from hydraulic fracturing, or the frac job(s). This treatment
data is viewed on the Treatment Curves Crossplot.
Like the point set data, the key fields in the treatment data are date, time, and stage. The
remaining data fields will vary among contractors. The treatment data file formats supported
by Kingdom are Microsoft Excel, and a variety of ASCII files in columnar format.
Once loaded, single or multiple treatment curves can be viewed in the Treatment Data
Crossplot in conjunction with the point set data in the 3D crossplot. The treatment data can
then be incorporated into the analysis of the microseismic data.
Note: Point set data must be loaded before treatment data. Both sets of data are saved as a
single data file under the name given for the point set. See Loading point sets.
1. Click the Load Treatment Data icon on the Microseismic toolbar or the Load Now link on
the Treatment Data Crossplot. This icon and link will only be active if you have already
loaded point set data.
2. Browse to and select the desired data file, and click Open. See Supported file formats.

3. Once selected, the loader will open with the first 10 rows of the file displayed with the
header row highlighted. If the highlighted row is not the header row, click on the header
row to highlight.
Note: The treatment data and point set data are saved as a single data set.
4. The required curves for treatment data are Timestamp and Stage. If the timestamp and
date are recognized, all fields will be pre-selected. Review the date under Applied data to
confirm that the application has applied the correct date pattern.
See Select Date/Time input formats for a more detailed discussion.
5. Select the treatment curves you want to load from the list of available. You may only need
a small subset. This will improve loading performance and simplify operations after the
data is loaded.

6. Click OK to load the data. You can now view the treatment curves in the Treatment
Curves crossplot.
Appending treatment data

Previous step:
The append file must have the same format as the original file. The loader will read the file
and populate the fields in the data loader.
1. Click the Treatment Data Append icon in the Microseismic toolbar.
2. Browse to and select the desired data file, and click Open.
All fields in the Data Loader are populated except any User defined Timestamp fields
that require manual input. See Select Date/Time input formats
Note: The primary fields in the treatment data are date and time. The date and time on
the append file should be after the date and time in the existing file.
3. Enter User defined timestamp data if required.

4. Select the treatment curves you want to load from the list of available. You may only need
a small subset. This will improve loading performance and simplify operations after the
data is loaded.
5. Click OK to append the data. The display in all views will dynamically update.
Note: As you append your existing treatment data with new data, calculations for any
new curves will automatically be applied to the appended data.

Validating data
Validating data
The Data Viewer displays all attributes of the loaded 3D point set data in columnar format and
provides a means to run a quick quality check of your data. The data is read only, but can be
adjusted on the Calculations tab. See Point set calculations for interpretation. The data
viewer dynamically updates as data is appended or adjusted.
The data is ordered in ascending order by the timestamp. In the example above, the date and
time are incorporated into a single field. However, they may also be separated fields.
You cannot sort or reorder the data.
Available options for the Data tab are the following:
• Export—export the data to a Microsoft Excel (*.xlsx) worksheet.
Remove Duplicates—remove duplicate data based on the timestamp. After the operation is
complete, a Results message will display the number of duplicates removed.
See Loading point sets for details on loading your data.

Selecting point set(s) to display

Once your point sets are loaded, you can display a single point set or multiple point sets.
Only a single point set can be active for manipulation at a time. The default is a single point
set display with no point set selected. When you select a point set, all its subsets (including
All Points) will be listed. By default, All Points will be selected and displayed.
Beside each subset name are three icons. Click on the relevant icon to Displaying subset
BFP and calculated volumes in the selected views, or again to remove from the display.
The four icons in the upper right (numbered 1-4 in the figure above) are for the following:
1. Selecting point sets for multiple point set display—opens another dialog box to select
which point sets to display.
2. Switch View - Single or Multiple—switches between the single point set display, and
the multiple point set display.
3. Search—expands the search field above the list of point sets. The subsets have a
separate search icon beside the subset title.
4. Collapse—collapse the point set display window to the side. Once collapsed, you can
click the labeled side bar to expand it again.

Selecting point sets for multiple point set display

From either the Single or Multiple Point Set Display, click the left most tools icon to open the
Select Point Sets dialog box. Available point sets are listed to the left.
Select the point sets you want to display together and click the right arrow to move them to
the Selected point sets.
Tip: Shift + selects multiple contiguous items, and Ctrl+ selects multiple, non-contiguous
items.
Under the list box of selected point sets are two links:
• Performance Considerations—describes factors that can affect performance. See
Performance considerations with multiple point set displays.
• Check Total Points—click to see the sum of the number of points in the selected point
sets.
When you have selected the point sets you want to display, click OK. Load time will depend
on the size of the point sets.
When the points have been loaded, the point set names will be listed under Multiple Point Set
Display in the Microseismic console.
Performance considerations with multiple point set displays

The following factors can negatively affect performance:

• Treatment curve data— the number and size of treatment curves displayed in the
Treatment Curves crossplot.
• Number of points in the selected set(s) and the number of point sets selected for the
display.
• Sphere resolution setting. Lowering the sphere resolution will improve performance.
Open the 3D Crossplot display options from Microseismic toolbar (number 12).
• The number of filters selected in the 3D Attributes tab.
If performance is not optimal, consider adjusting some of these parameters.


The Treatment Curves tab in the VuPAK Microseismic console plots treatment curves and
point set attributes together on the same crossplot for integrated, detailed analysis of the
effect of the frac treatments on the reservoir. The main crossplot displays the selected curves
and attributes of the defined stage range. The ribbon below the crossplot displays a
thumbnail image of each loaded stage and is used to adjust the range of the displayed data.
Below the display range ribbon are the animation controls. The bottom expandable Stages
ribbon provides the options to display all stages or a single stage. If you have a large number
of stages, the forward and back arrows will page you through to the next ‘set’ of stages. The
graphic representation of the stage is determined by the shape of the first curve selected (the
Y axis to the left of the graph.)
1. Select the data type and associated attributes/curves you want to display and click the
arrow to move the items to the Selected box. You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select
multiple items. Remember, both treatment curves and point set attributes can be
displayed on the same graph.
2. After you have selected the items to display, a number of tools and view options are
available for treatment curve and point set analysis. See the following topics:
• Adjusting the 2D Display Segment and Range (Zoom)

• Using treatment data to filter point set data

• Animating through the full range of crossplot
• Viewing options for your point set(s)
In the image below, three curves are plotted: surface pressure, slurry rate, and proppant
concentrate. Three stages are loaded, but the viewing area has been set to view the first two
stages. The default color for each vertical axis is the same as the curve color for that curve pr
attribute.
Figure 1 Treatment Curves Crossplot with 3 Treatment Curves and 3 Point Set Attributes Plotted

Adjusting the 2D Display Segment and Range (Zoom)

The default display range of your treatment curves is the entire graph. You will probably want
to narrow your view to a smaller range.
You can adjust the range of the graph display by clicking the left or right arrow of the range
viewer and dragging left or right. The range viewer is located directly below the Treatment
Curves Crossplot.
You can also manually move the selected range left and right. Left click on the selected
range. Your cursor will change from a hand to a double arrow as in the image below. As you
drag the range right or left, the crossplot display will move.
You can also animate through the full range of the crossplot to correlate the hydraulic fracture
treatment data with the microseismic events.
Using treatment data to filter point set data

Treatment data can be used to filter your point set data by adding it to your list of filters on the
3D Attributes tab and then specifying a treatment curve range.
In the right corner beneath the Treatment Curves crossplot is a checkbox for Use as filter. By
default, this option is checked on. When this option is on, the active segment of treatment
data acts as a filter for the point set display.
If the entire range of treatment data is selected (active), then all point set data in the selected
subset will be displayed. If you narrow the range of the visible segment (essentially zoom in
to a section of the treatment curves), then only the data points that fall within the active range
will be displayed.
Note: Each data point in the point set represents a single microseismic event.
Figure 2 Adjust Range of Treatment Curves Crossplot

You can adjust the displayed segment and segment range on the Treatment Curves
Crossplot or from the 3D Attributes tab. See Adjusting the 2D Display Segment and Range
(Zoom).
When Use as filter is selected, Treatment Data is added as an attribute on the 3D Crossplot
tab and appears in the list of filters:
Moving the sliders for this filter is the same as adjusting the range on the Treatment Curves
Crossplot as in the figure above.

Animating through the full range of crossplot

After you have set the range of your Treatment Curves crossplot to the desired time interval,
you can animate this segment through the full range of your crossplot and view the
corresponding point set in the displayed views. You can also pin one side of the segment and
animate the other, again viewing the dynamically changing point set display thereby
correlating the hydraulic fracture treatment data with the microseismic events.
The animation controls are located directly below the range selector on the Treatment Curves
Crossplot.
Note: The controls and crossplot options are only visible when you have treatment and/or
point set data displayed on the crossplot.
Figure 3 2D Treatment Curves Crossplot Animation Controls
1. Select an Animation mode (red pin). The following options are available:
• Pin off—the specified range will scroll through the data
• Pin left side—the left edge will stay at the selected starting point. The right edge will
scroll, expanding the range to the right.
• Pin right side—the right edge will stay at the selected starting point. The left edge will
scroll, expanding the range to the left.
2. Left click on the segment and move the segment to the desired starting point.
3. Click the Play icon to begin the animation. To adjust the speed, move the Speed slider on
the animations control.
4. Click the Stop icon to pause or stop the animation. Click Play to continue the animation
from that spot.

Viewing options for your point set(s)

Kingdom’s Microseismic provides multiple visualization options and tools to interactively view
and analyze your microseismic data. Views include the VuPAK workspace, the base map, a
VSD, and the 3D Crossplot. Point sets from multiple wells can be displayed at the same time.
In a 3D view (VuPAK or 3D Crossplot) the default axes assignment is your event loci XYZ
coordinates if the fields are recognized when loading. To check or change the axes
assignment, click the Parameters tab and select Axes. See Change Axes for 3D crossplot.
Manipulation Mode—in the 3D crossplot and VuPAK, use your left mouse button to rotate,
move, manipulate the active point set. When in manipulation mode, the cursor is a hand.
Select Mode—in Select mode (arrow cursor) you can cut and crop points. See Manually cut
and crop points. To exit from Select mode, click the arrow/lasso icon. the icon will change
color and you will be able to manipulate your point set.
• Viewing your point set—view the point set simultaneously in a 3D view (VuPAK or the 3D
Crossplot), on the Kingdom base map, and on a VSD.
• Select point set attributes to display—by default, all attributes are displayed - both loaded
and calculated. Make changes to the displayed attributes from the Parameters tab.
• Selecting color and size for point set display—select which attributes you want to assign
for the color and size of the points.
Viewing your point set

View the point set simultaneously in VuPAK, on the Kingdom base map, and on a VSD. Edits
to any view are dynamically applied to all views. If your point set is not visible, see Why Can’t
I see my Microseismic point set?
To select your views, click the Views icon in the Microseismic toolbar. The four views are
listed with a slider to adjust the size of the point set in the respective views.
By default, all views are selected.

Select the desired views. With the point set displayed, move the respective scale slider right
to make the point set larger, and left to make the point set smaller.
Note: The size of the point set is static and will not change if you zoom in or out of the
display.
- Displaying point set in VuPAK

- Displaying point set in a VSD
- Displaying point set on the base map
Displaying point set in VuPAK

Display your point set of microseismic events in VuPAK along side the Microseismic Console.
Use the slider bar in the Views selector to adjust the size of the points. See Viewing your
point set.
As you filter and manually cut or crop the points in the Microseismic Console, all views are
updated.
If you are in Manual Selection mode, you can also select points in the VuPAK workspace by
the same methods as in the 3D Crossplot. See Manually cut and crop points. As you select
points in VuPAK, the selection is displayed in all views.
If you can’t see your point set, see Why Can’t I see my Microseismic point set? for
troubleshooting tips.

Displaying point set in a VSD

Display your point set of microseismic events in a VSD in depth or time along side the
Microseismic Console. Use the slider bar in the Views selector to adjust the size of the points.
Tip: Before you can view your data in a time VSD you need to calculate a Z-Time attribute.
See Time-Depth curve (Z-Time Attribute)
updated.

If Manual Selection mode is turned on in the console, you can also select points in the VSD
by digitizing a polygon with successive clicks. As you select points in the VSD, the selection
is updated and displayed in all views. See Manually cut and crop points.
If you can’t see your point set on the VSD, see Why Can’t I see my Microseismic point set?
for troubleshooting tips.
Displaying point set on the base map

Display your point set of microseismic events in the Kingdom base map along side the
Microseismic Console. Use the slider bar in the Views selector to adjust the size of the points.
updated.
If Manual Selection mode is turned on in the console, you can also select points in the base
map by digitizing a polygon with successive clicks. As you select points in the base map, the
selection is updated and displayed in all views. See Manually cut and crop points.

Why Can’t I see my Microseismic point set?

If you can’t see your data in one of the views, see the following troubleshooting tips for the
different views:
• VuPAK point set display
• VSD point set display
Tip: To open the 3D Crossplot, click the Select Views icon in the Microseismic toolbar.
VuPAK point set display

If you do not see your point set in the VuPAK workspace, check the following:
• Axes Assignment—in the Microseismic Console, click the Parameters tab and then
click Axes. Make sure the attributes for your X, Y, and Z axes (both Z-Depth and Z-Time)
are valid.
• VuPAK Viewing Area—In VuPAK, select Visualization > Select Viewing Area. If the
viewing area is too large, then your point set may not be visible. Try adjusting the
following:
- extents—one easy option is to digitize on the base map.

- vertical bounds—to find the vertical range of your point set data, click the Data tab.
The Z attribute column will give you the range of data.
If you select Z as a filter on the 3D Attributes tab, the minimum and maximum values will be
displayed to the left and right of the slider bar. See Filtering data and creating subsets.
VSD point set display

If you do not see your point set in the VSD, check the following:
• VSD Corridor—in the Microseismic Console, click the General Settings icon in the
upper right corner and check that the VSD corridor is not too narrow. See 3D crossplot
display options.
• VSD Z Units and Axes Assignment—in the Microseismic Console, check the attributes
assigned to Z-Depth and Z-Time (if calculated). See Time-Depth curve (Z-Time Attribute).
If you have valid depth and time attributes assigned to your axes, your point set should be
visible in the VSD.
Selecting color and size for point set display

See also 3D crossplot display options on how to set background color, highlight color, and the
VSD corridor.
One of the first steps when you Viewing options for your point set(s) is to select which
attributes you want to assign for the color and size of the points. You can also set a minimum
and maximum value for the colorbar to allow for consistency between point sets when
displaying multiple sets.
With your loaded and configured point set data displayed in the 3D Crossplot and other
views, select the 3D Attributes tab in the Microseismic Console. The top controls enable you
to select color and size, as well as change the colorbar and adjust the overall size of the
points.
Click the down arrow beside Color and Size to display all available attributes. A common
select ion is for the color of the point to represent the treatment stage, and the size to
represent the magnitude of the microseismic event.

Additional options include:

• Colorbar—click the select colorbar icon and browse to the desired colorbar file. Kingdom
installs the colorbars in the TKS87 installation directory.
• Colorbar Min/Max—Specify colorbar min/max values to provide consistency between
wells when displaying multiple point sets.
• Size Scale—move the slider to increase or decrease the size of the point set. All views
(VuPAK, VSD, base map, and 3D Crossplot) will update simultaneously.
Specify colorbar min/max values

The default minimum and maximum values for the color bar are the minimum and maximum
values for the selected attribute. A common reason to specify these values is to provide
consistency between wells when displaying multiple point sets.
For example, if you are displaying the point sets of 3 wells with varying number of stages:
Well A has 13 stages
Well B has 15 stages
Well C has 17 stages
If you define your color by the stage number and set the color bar maximum to 17, stages 1-
13 will be the same color for all wells. A set of 40 color bars with 2-40 colors have been
added to the Colorbar folder in the Kingdomsuite installation folder. These color bars are
name n_Random_Colors where n = 2 through 40.
In the example above, you would select 17_Random_Colors.CLB for your color bar.

Point set calculations for interpretation

Required calculations for Z-Depth and Project XY’s (if XY format is Dx-Easting) are done
during loading using the reference well information and the Kingdom project seismic datum
elevation. However, once your data is loaded, you can apply additional calculations to your
point set and create new attributes for analysis.
In addition, if you change your reference well, you will need to recalculate any Project XY
calculations done during loading if your XY format was Dx-Easting.
The data for the calculated attributes are included on the Data tab in columnar format. See
Validating data.
Note: If your XY values were already your Project XY’s, no calculations will be required.
The following calculations are available:
Basic Math In addition to required calculations, you have the option to apply a
Calculations basic math operation to any attribute such as a time or depth bulk
shift, After the calculation, the edited attribute is saved.
Coordinate correction XYZ coordinate correction for each well is calculated during
loading. However, if you change your reference well and your
original XY format was Dx-Easting / Dy-Northing, then you will
have to run the XY calculations again and create new attributes.
The new attributes will automatically be assigned to the respective
axes.
Time-Depth curve (Z- Select a well and time-depth chart for the calculation of Z-Time.
Time Attribute)
Borehole Distance Calculate the distance of each microseismic event loci from the
frac well borehole.
Horizon distance Calculate the distance in time or depth from the Z value of each
point (MSE loci) to the Z value of a selected horizon at a common
XY location and creates an attribute with these values.
Extract data type Extract a selected data type from a seismic volume at the MSE loci
from MSE Loci (points).
Fracture Velocity Calculate the fracture velocity of a treatment using the distance
from the center of the treatment interval divided by the elapsed
time from the beginning of the stage.
Stimulated Rock Calculate the volume of rock stimulated by a single stage, or the
Volumes (SRV) frac job.
Note: Calculations for any new attributes will automatically be applied to appended data.

Basic Math Calculations

In addition to required calculations, you have the option to apply a basic math operation to
any attribute such as a time or depth bulk shift, After the calculation, the edited attribute is
saved.
Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Basic Math on the left.
See Editing point set parameters for an overview of other corrections and calculations.
1. Select the attribute on which you want to apply the math operation.
2. Select an operator: add, subtract, multiply, or divide.
3. Enter a scalar value and new attribute name.
4. Click Calculate. The scalar value will be applied to the attribute with the specified
operator.
5. Open the Data tab to view the new attribute values. See Validating data.
Note: This calculation - and all calculations - will be automatically applied to new data
appended to the point set.
Coordinate correction
XYZ coordinate correction is calculated during loading. However, if you change your
reference well (Well associations) or there was an error in the reference well elevation you
will need to run a calculation for a new Z-Depth attribute. See Select Date/Time input formats.

In addition, if you change the reference well and your original XY format was Dx-Easting / Dy-
Northing, then you will have to run the XY calculations again and create new attributes. See
Case 2: XY format is Dx-Easting.
The new attributes will automatically be assigned to the respective axes.
1. Confirm the Z and XY values for the Reference well.
2. Beside Depth (Dz), select the original depth attribute from the point set file.
3. Enter a name for the new Z-Depth attribute. If you enter the same name as an existing
attribute, the existing attribute will be overwritten.
4. Click Calculate to run a Z calculation only, or continue with the XY correction if your
original XY format was Dx-Easting / Dy-Northing.
5. Beside Easting (Dx) and Northing (Dy) select the respective attributes that you selected
during the initial loading.
6. Enter names for the new X and Y attributes and click Calculate.

Time-Depth curve (Z-Time Attribute)

If you have an active local or shared Time-Depth chart for the frac well, you can calculate a Z-
Time attribute. You can then view your point set data in Z-Time in VuPAK and the VSD.
1. Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Time-Depth Curve on
the left. See Point set calculations for interpretation for an overview of other corrections
and calculations.
2. Specify the following for the T-D Chart calculation:

• Well—defaults to the frac well if it has a T-D chart.
• Borehole—defaults to the borehole selected for the frac well.
• T-D Chart—defaults to the active local or shared T-D chart for the selected well and
borehole. If no T-D chart is active, then select from the available T-D charts.
• Z-Depth—select the attribute that corresponds to Z-Depth. If Kingdom does not
recognize the attribute name that corresponds to Z-Depth, select it from the list.
• Attribute Name—enter a name for the Z-Time attribute (Z-Time for example). If a
calculated attribute with that name already exists, you can overwrite it or enter a
different name. You cannot overwrite the original attributes.
Note: To view or edit T-D Charts, in the Kingdom main menu select Wells > Edit > Time-
Depth Charts. See Edit Time-Depth Charts.
3. Click Calculate. The point set data will be updated with the calculated attribute.

Note: This calculation—and all calculations—will be automatically applied to new data

Borehole Distance
The Borehole Distance calculation provides an attribute to subset your point set data by
distance from the frac well. Other optional calculations are Dip and Azimuth calculations.
The only input of data required is a name for the new attribute(s). All other fields were defined
during loading.
1. Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Borehole Distance on
and calculations.
2. Review the well and axes information. These fields are non-editable in this interface.
3. Enter new attribute names for distance from the borehole, dip, and azimuth, and click
Calculate.
Note: Dip and Azimuth calculations are optional.
4. Open the Data tab to view the new attribute values.

You can now use this attribute as a filter to view the point set by distance from the borehole.
See Filtering data and creating subsets.


Dip and Azimuth calculations

Dip and azimuth calculations are optional attributes when you calculate Borehole Distance.
Dip
In a vertical view, the dip angle is the angle between a reference plane (horizontal at the
borehole location for each point) and the point. Points below the horizontal plane have a
positive dip. Points above the horizontal plane have a negative dip.
The figure above illustrates the dip calculation of 2 points, P1 and P2, with respect to the
horizontal plane the intersects the point on the borehole nearest to each respective point. In
this example, P1 and P2 share the same point on the borehole.
Azimuth
Azimuth is calculated from true north to the line from the microseismic event perpendicular to
the wellbore. The figure below illustrates the calculation:

Horizon distance
The Distance from Horizon calculation calculates the distance in time or depth from the Z
value of each point (MSE loci) to the Z value of a selected horizon at a common XY location
and creates an attribute with these values. You can then subset your point set data by
distance from the selected horizon.
Note: Horizon distance can only be calculated on points where the XY values have a match
in the horizon.
The input data required is the horizon, an associated survey, and a new attribute name.
1. Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Horizon Distance on
and calculations.
2. Show: Select your Z type. Show Time Only or Depth Only horizons.
3. Select Horizon—only horizons with the selected Z type will be listed. Enter a search
string to narrow the list if desired and select the horizon.
4. Select Survey—only surveys associated with the selected horizon will be listed. Enter a
search string to narrow the list if desired and select a survey.
5. Enter a new attribute name and click Calculate.

6. Open the Data tab to view the calculated distance values.

7. You can now use this attribute as a filter to view the point set by distance from the
selected horizon. See Filtering data and creating subsets.
Extract data type from MSE Loci

The Extract Data Type calculation extracts a selected data type from a seismic volume at the
MSE loci (points). Listed are the surveys that contain volumes in the selected time or depth
data type, and all available (time or depth) data types for that survey.
The input data required is the survey, the seismic data type you want to extract, and a new
attribute name.
1. Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Extract Data Type on
and calculations.

2. Show: Select your data type. Show only surveys that have volumes of the selected data
type: Time Only or Depth Only.
3. Select Survey—only surveys that have volumes in the selected data type will be listed.
Enter a search string to narrow the list if desired and select the survey.
4. Enter a new attribute name and click Calculate.
5. Open the Data tab to view the extracted data type values.
6. You can now use this attribute as a filter to view the point set by seismic data type. See
Filtering data and creating subsets.

Fracture Velocity
Fracture Velocity makes the following calculations for each microseismic event and creates
corresponding attributes for analysis:
Calculation / Attribute
Description
Default Name
Perforation distance The distance from the center of the treatment interval to the
FracVelocityPerfDistance microseismic event.
Stage time The elapsed time from the beginning of the stage to the time
FracVelocityStageTime of the specific event.
Velocity Velocity = perforation distance / by time.

FracVelocity
Valid treatment data is required for the calculations. Treatment data is stored in the
Completions tab in Well Explorer. Each completion record can have multiple treatments.
Each treatment has a start and end depth, and a corresponding stage number, which ties the
treatment to the stage of the Microseismic events.
To calculate fracture velocity:

1. Select the Calculations tab in the Microseismic Console and click Fracture Velocity on
and calculations.
2. Because valid treatment data is required for the calculation, the following options are
available to check and add treatments:
• Check existing treatments—opens the Completions tab in Well Explorer which
displays the completion intervals and corresponding treatment intervals for each in
sub tabs.
• Bulk Add treatments—provides a data grid that you can populate with completion
treatment intervals and stages. The data will be written to the project database and
will populate both the Completions tab in Well Explorer, and the Perforations tab.
3. Check the calculations you want to make. The Velocity calculation requires the distance
and time calculations. An attribute is created for each calculation. You can review the
calculated attribute values in the Data tab. New attributes are added as columns to the
right. See Validating data.
Tip: See Select point set attributes to display for details on deleting calculated attributes and
hiding the original attributes in the Data tab.

Check existing treatments

1. In the Microseismic Fracture Velocity tab click Check Existing Treatments to open the
Completions tab in Well Explorer. The start and end depths of each completion interval
are displayed. A completions interval is not stage-based. One completions interval can
have multiple treatments, each with their own stage.
2. Expand a Completion header row to display the Treatment data within that completion.
3. Scroll to the right to view the Stage for the treatment.
If the completion and treatment intervals (and stages) have not been entered, you can enter
them here or enter them in the Bulk Add treatments dialog box.
Bulk Add treatments

1. In the Calculations Fracture Velocity tab click Bulk Add Treatments to open the Add
Treatments dialog box where you can enter treatment start, end, and stage data for the
frac well.
You can also enter/view data in the Completions tab in Well Explorer.
2. Enter the treatment perforation data manually or by Copy / Paste.
Manual Entry—Click Add Row. Then double-click in each cell to make the cell editable
and enter the numeric data. When the row is complete, add another row and continue
with the data input. You can also tab to the next cell.
Copy / Paste (Ctrl+C / Ctrl+V)—copy the three columns of data from an Excel
spreadsheet. Then in the Add Perforations table, paste by one of the following:
- Add a row. Highlight the row and Ctrl+V to paste. Rows will be created as required
and the table will be populated with the data.
- Ctrl+V in the blank grid without adding a row. The table will populate with the data.
Note: Numbers that include other characters such as unit symbols are not
recognized. Numbers with commas are only supported if the cells in Excel are
defined as Number Format.
Stimulated Rock Volumes (SRV)

Stimulated Rock Volumes are the volume of rock stimulated by a treatment based on the
shrink wrap volume of events (points) per stage or per job. You can run SRV calculations on
all points or on a subset. The algorithm for the Shrink Wrap volume type is the smallest
volume occupied by any given set of points.
Calculations fall into two categories:
• Cumulative—cumulative volume, time, or index of events for the stage or job, including
events for subsequent stages that fall within the bounds of existing volumes.
• Cumulative non-redundant—cumulative volume, time, or index of events for the stage
or job that are outside of any existing volumes. Non-redundant calculations only consider

new stimulated rock. If the volumes of two stages overlap, the volume for the second
stage excludes the overlap.
Within each category, the following calculations can be run on each stage and on the job (the
cumulative stages). A default attribute name is provided but can be edited:
Volume The shrink wrap volume of the events for the stage and job.
Time The elapsed time from the beginning of the stage or job to the end.
Index An incremental, integer index beginning at 1 of the time order of events in the
stage or job.
After the calculations, you can plot the attributes on the 2D Crossplot. Typical trends are
illustrated in the figures below:

The figure above crossplots the cumulative non-redundant volumes for each stage against the cumulate
non-redundant job time. The points are colored by stage. Stage 5 (blue) stimulated the highest rock volume.
Stage 6 had two distinct phases of rock stimulation.
The figure above crossplots the cumulative non-redundant volumes for the job against the cumulate non-
redundant time. The points are colored by stage. Stage 5 (blue) stimulated the highest rock volume
followed by stage 6.
The volume units are based on the map (surface) units of the Kingdom project, even in the
case where the depth unit is different from the surface unit. for example, if the base map XY
unit is in meters, but the depth is in feet, the volume of the SRV will be in cubic meters.
See 2D Crossplot of attributes/curves for more information on plotting point set and treatment
curves on the 2D Crossplot.

Graphical analysis tools

• Treatment Curves crossplot—plot treatment curves and point set attributes together on
the same crossplot. View stage by stage, and animate or scroll through the full range of
data.
• 2D Crossplot of attributes/curves—create a 2D crossplot of any 2 point set attributes and/
or treatment curves. Select from available microseismic event and treatment curves.
Then add additional attribute data by selecting an attribute for the point color. Up to 8
attributes can be plotted.
• Attribute histogram—for all points or individual stages, select a point set or treatment
curve for the histogram, which displays the frequency the attribute values fall within the
corresponding bin. The number of bins can be between 10 and 100.
2D Crossplot of attributes/curves
The 2D Crossplot plots any 2 attributes or curves, loaded or calculated, on a generic
crossplot. Microseismic event attributes and treatment curves can be plotted together on the
same crossplot. You can then select any attribute/curve to define the colorbar.
Each list can be filtered by entering a search term in the search box. The list will dynamically
update to include only those names that contain the entered string anywhere in the name.
See Viewing your point set for all display options.

1. With the pointset and treatment data loaded, click the 2D Crossplot icon in the
Microseismic toolbar (10) to open the 2D Crossplot dialog box.
2. At the top of the Settings area, select to plot All Points or a subset. All Points is the
default.
3. Select an attribute from either the point set list or the treatment data list for the X axis.
Select multiple point set and/or treatment curves to plot against the X axis attribute. The
points will be plotted when attributes for both axes have been selected.
You can change your attribute selection anytime. The crossplot will dynamically update
with your selection.
4. Select an attribute to define the colorbar. Until a color attribute is selected, the points will
be black. The color attribute essentially acts as a third attribute for your crossplot. For
example, if you selected Confidence for your colorbar, the color of the points would
correspond to the confidence level. Confidence generally runs on a scale of 0-5.
5. Zoom in to a selected portion of your point set by moving the end arrows to define the
segment. Pan by moving the segment left or right.

6. Format your crossplot. Right click on the chart, an axis, or the points and select the
respective Format option. See 2D crossplot formatting options.
To display only the crossplot, click the Settings arrow in the upper left corner to collapse
the attribute/curve selection section.
7. To save the crossplot as a .bmp image, right click on any empty chart area and select
Save Image. In the Save as dialog box, browse to a location and enter a file name
Tip: You can display multiple 2D crossplots at the same time. Just click the 2D Crossplot
icon and select different attributes.
Attribute histogram
Click the Histogram icon in the Microseismic toolbar to create a histogram for any point set,
subset, or treatment curve. The histogram (a vertical bar chart) shows the distribution of a set
of data - in this case the selected attribute - clearly displaying where the majority of values fall
and the amount of variation.The number of bins can be between 10 and 100.
The X axis is the attribute values. The Y axis is the frequency the attribute value is found in
the data.

1. With the pointset and treatment curves loaded, click the Histogram icon to open the
Histogram dialog box.
2. Select All Points or a subset.
3. Select an item from either the point set list or the treatment curve list. The histogram will
appear with the default number of bins (bars).
You can change your item selection anytime. The histogram will dynamically update with
your selection.
4. If desired, change the number of bins and click Apply. View the rebinned histogram.
5. To display only the histogram, click the Settings arrow in the upper left corner to collapse
the attribute selection section.
Tip: You can display multiple histograms at the same time. Just click the histogram icon and
select a different attribute.

Filtering data and creating subsets

Filter the point set by available attributes on the 3D Attributes tab.
• Apply attribute filters—Filter your loaded point set with any or all of the point set
attributes.
• Using treatment data to filter point set data—filter the microseismic data by the displayed
range of treatment data on the Treatment Curves Crossplot.
• Manually cut and crop points—lasso, digitize, and click to select microseismic events.
These selections can then be saved as subsets.
• Managing point sets and subsets—save, select, rename, and delete.
Apply attribute filters

With your loaded and configured point set data displayed in the 3D Crossplot and other
views, select the 3D Attributes tab in the Microseismic Console.
The initial setting is for the first attribute in the file (in this case, X) and Treatment Data (if
loaded) to be displayed as Filters.
1. Click the down arrow beside the first attribute and select an attribute to filter the data.
In the figure below the first attribute selected is Magnitude. To the right of the attribute
name, the smallest and largest values for the attribute appear in the boxes to the left and
right of the slider bar. These values can be adjusted to set upper and lower limits for the
visible points.
In this example, treatment data has been loaded and is being used as a filter. See
Viewing options for your point set(s)Using treatment data to filter point set data.

2. Click the green plus icon above the Filter box to add additional attributes to the list. By
default the first attribute in the file is selected.
3. As additional attributes are added, click the down arrow beside each and select an
attribute.
Note: At any time, return to your views and manipulate the point set for a closer look of
the data.
4. Move the slider bars beside each attribute to filter the visible points. As you move the
slider the upper and lower limit values update. Only the points that fall within the set range
will be visible.
You can also enter values for the lower and upper limits manually. The slider bar(s) will
update to the position that matches the entered value(s).
5. At any time you can save the visible points as a subset (Managing point sets and
subsets), or Manually cut and crop points to further refine the subset.
Other options:
• Reset—click the Undo / Reset icon to reset all filters to full extents.
• Delete filter—click the x to the right of the filter to remove it from the list. Filters are not
saved.
Manually cut and crop points

See also Filtering data and creating subsets.
After you have filtered your point set by setting the lower and upper limits for each attribute
filter, you can further refine your point set by manually selecting points to cut or crop.
Note: Applying attribute filters is not a requirement but it is a common workflow to apply
filters first.
You can digitize or select points on any of the views: 3D crossplot, base map, VSD, or VuPAK
1. On the 3D Attributes tab, click the Manually Select icon to lasso, digitize, or click and
select points.
Tip: First select a highlight color. Pick a color that contrasts with the colors in your point set.
As you select successive points, they will be highlighted (outlined) by the color you
select. See 3D crossplot display options.

2. In the 3D Crossplot or any of the other views (base map, VSD, VuPAK) select the points
to cut or crop.
• 3D Crossplot and VuPAK—digitize (lasso) points. As you click and drag your cursor
on the displayed point set, a dashed line will appear. The polygon will automatically
close when you stop digitizing. All lassoed points that touch or are within the digitized
polygon will be selected. You can also point and select individual points. Use the Shift
key to successively select multiple points
• VSD and base map—digitize successive points to create an enclosed polygon.
Double click to finish digitizing. All points that touch or are inside of the polygon will be
selected.
Selected points will be highlighted.
3. After you have selected the points, click the cut or crop icon:
• —Cut or remove the selected points from the point set.
• —Cut or remove all points except the selected points from the point set.
4. As you cut or crop points, the number of points and the operation are listed under Manual
selections.
5. Continue to cut and crop. When you are satisfied with the displayed subset, click the
Save icon in the tool bar and enter a name for the subset. The name will appear in the list
of Subsets.

Managing point sets and subsets

Manipulate your microseismic point set in the different views and create subsets. See
Filtering data and creating subsets.
When you are satisfied with the displayed subset, click the Save icon in the tool bar:
- Subset name—enter a name for the subset.
- Create associated fault—create a fault in your project based on the calculated best
fit plane for the point set or subset. By default, the name is the same as the point set
or subset name. However, you can enter a differentiae name if desired.
The new subset will appear in the list of Subsets. Each loaded point set can have multiple
subsets. The fault will appear in your Project Tree.
T
Select a loaded point set and then check

the subset(s) you want displayed.
Subsets can be displayed in the 3D
workspace (VuPAK and 3D Crossplot) and
in the 2D workspace (base map and
VSD). See Viewing your point set.
Click on the relevant icon(s) beside each

subset to calculate and display subset
points, BFP, and/or selected volume. See
Displaying subset BFP and calculated
volumes.
You can also select multiple subsets and
then click the relevant icon below the list.
See also Calculating subset statistics to
run other calculations and view on an
exportable spreadsheet
Note: To display only a subset you must uncheck All Points first.
Use the following icons to manage your point sets and subsets and control your displays:

Rename your subset.
Delete the subset.
Display the subset points.
Calculate and display the BFP for the subset.
Calculate and display the selected volume: Bounding Box or Shrink Wrap
Create subsets from loaded stages. A separate subset will be created for each
stage in your data.
The following Point Set and Subset Management options are also available:
• Editing an existing subset
• Renaming a point set or subset
• Deleting a point set or subset
Editing an existing subset

1. Select and display the subset.
2. Edit by manually cutting / cropping or by applying attribute filters.
3. Click the Save icon and enter the same name as the existing subset. The text field will be
outlined in a Warning yellow indicating that a subset with that name already exists.
4. Click Save to overwrite.
Renaming a point set or subset

1. Select the point set or subset that you want to rename.
2. Click the Rename button below the corresponding list of point sets or subsets. Rename is
also available from a right click on the item.
3. Enter a new name and click OK to apply the changes.
Deleting a point set or subset

Note: Deleting a point set only removes the point set and corresponding subsets from the
project. The original point set data files and associated treatment data files are not
deleted.
Tip: Delete selected is also available from a right click on the item.

Delete a point set

1. Select the point set that you want to delete.
2. Click the Delete selected button below the list of point sets. The selected point set and all
associated subsets will be deleted. Deleting a point set also removes any loaded
treatment data for that point set.
Delete a subset
1. Select the point set and highlight the associated subset(s) that you want to delete. (The
checkbox means that the subset is displayed, not selected for deletion.)
• Use the Shift key to select multiple contiguous subsets.
• Use the Ctrl key to select multiple separated subsets.
2. Under Subsets, click the Delete selected button. Note that even if All Points is checked,
it will not be deleted.
For loading instructions see Loading point sets and Loading treatment data.

Calculating subset statistics

After subsets are created, you can calculate and view the BFP or selected volume by clicking
the icon beside the subset name in the list of subsets. See Displaying subset BFP and
calculated volumes.
Subsets are created by the following:
• Filtering data and creating subsets
• Manually cut and crop points
You can also run other available calculations and view the results in a spreadsheet which can
then be exported to Microsoft Excel 2007 or later.
1. In the Microseismic toolbar click the Calculate Subset Statistics icon to open the Subset
Statistics workspace figured below:
2. Select the subsets from the list of available for the active point set and click the arrow (or
double arrow to select all) to move them to the Selected subsets.
3. Click the green plus sign and add attributes for the minimum and maximum calculations.
4. Check to select from available BFP and Volume calculations.
5. A default name for each calculated statistic is provided. The default name is the full
attribute name followed by the calculation. Change the name if desired.
6. Click Calculate.

7. View results in the spreadsheet.

8. To save the spreadsheet of subset statistics, export to Excel and then save the
spreadsheet as an *.xlsx file.
9. View the subset best fit planes and volumes in the 3d crossplot or VuPAK workspace.
See Displaying subset BFP and calculated volumes.
The figure below shows the default names for the available calculations.
The following calculations are available:
Calculation Comments
Number of points in the subset % of total points = no. of points in subset / all points.
% of total points

Calculation Comments
BFP Calculations: The BFP calculation is done using the least squares
Length method. The objective is to minimize the sum of the squares
of the vertical distances between the data and the plane.
Width
Area
At least 3 non-colinear points are required to calculate a
Strike
BFP.
Dip
Bounding Box Calculations: The Bounding Box volume is the smallest cuboid that
Length encloses the points. The bounding box is oriented to the
data points, not the axes.
Width
Area
Inverse density is the bounding box volume divided number
Volume
of points in the subset.
Inverse Density*
Shrink Wrap Calculations: The Shrink Wrap volume is the volume bounded by the
Volume convex hull where the convex hull of a set of points is the
smallest convex region containing all of the points.
Inverse Density*
Inverse density is the shrink wrap volume divided number of

points in the subset.
Point Volume The point volume multiplies the number of points in the
subset by the entered radius. The radius defaults to 1.
Attribute Minimum Click the green plus icon above the Attribute Min/Max box to
Attribute Maximum add additional attributes to the list.
By default the first attribute is selected.
As additional attributes are added, click the down arrow

beside each and select an attribute.
Note: 4 or more non-coplanar points are required for a volume calculation.
*The point density for both shrink wrap and bounding box volumes is typically an extremely
small number. For this reason, the inverse calculation (volume divided by number of points) is
made. The larger the number, the smaller the actual density.

Displaying subset BFP and calculated volumes
View the points, Best Fit Plane, and selected volume (Bounding Box or
Shrink Wrap) of selected subsets.
Click the icon beside a specific subset, or select multiple subsets and then click the icon
below the list to calculate and display the object for all selected subsets.
The points will display in all views: VSD, base map, VuPAK, and the 3D Crossplot. The BFP
and selected volume will be displayed in the 3D workspaces.
The figures below show the volume types of the same subset displayed. The Best Fit Planes
and points are also displayed and visible.

Select which volume to display in the Display Settings in the upper right corner of the
Microseismic console.

Editing point set parameters

The following parameters are specified when loading your data. However, you can view/
change these parameters if required from the Parameters tab which contains the following:
Associations Displays the frac and reference wells. These wells are
selected during loading.
Axes Change the XYZ axes assignment for the 3D Crossplot. The
default assignment is your event loci XYZ coordinates defined
during loading. Z-Time is not defined during loading.
Attributes to display Select the point set attributes to display. By default all
attributes are selected for filtering and display.
The Parameters tab also includes treatment curves management where you can select
attributes to display, and delete attributes.
Well associations
Well associations for your point set are specified during the loading process. However, you
can view and/or edit these associations from the Parameters tab in the Microseismic
Console. Click Associations on the left to view the selected frac and reference well, and
associated parameters. See also Select Frac and Reference Well(s).
Note: When you click Select beside the frac or reference well, only the working set of wells
is displayed. Your working set of wells is determined by the wells turned on in your
Kingdom Project Tree or Work Tree, not the VuPAK Project Tree.
If the frac or reference well is not listed, return to the Kingdom Project Tree and make
sure it is turned on.
The Associations tab includes the following:

• Frac well—the well used to apply the hydraulic fracturing treatment to the rock formation.
- Boreholes—for some calculations, the distance of the microseismic events from the
borehole is required. If the frac well has more than one borehole, select the treated
borehole from the list.
- Active deviation survey—displays the active deviation survey for the selected frac
well and borehole. If this field is blank, there is no active deviation survey. This field is
not editable.
• Reference well—the well monitoring the microseismic events. The default is to use the
frac well as the reference well. To specify a different reference well, uncheck Use frac
well, and click Select. All wells in the working set will be displayed.

• Well datum, X, Y—the well datum and XY coordinates for the reference well are read
from the database and displayed. This information is not editable in this interface. To edit
well information, select Wells > Edit in the Kingdom main menu.
Change Axes for 3D crossplot

To open the 3D crossplot, click the Select Views icon in the Microseismic toolbar.
Attributes are assigned for your X, Y, and Z axes during loading. The default axes assignment
is your event loci XYZ coordinates. However, you can specify any attributes for your axes.
1. Select the Parameters tab in the Microseismic Console and click Axes.
2. The default X, Y, and Z attributes are already assigned. If you have calculated a Z-Time
attribute, it will also be displayed.
3. To change the attribute assignment for an axis, click the down arrow beside the displayed
attribute and select from the list.

Note: If you have a Z-Time attribute, then you can display your point set in all time and
depth displays in Kingdom. However, the Microseismic 3D Crossplot only displays in
Z-Depth.
Select point set attributes to display

Select which point set attributes you want to display. By default all attributes are displayed -
both loaded and calculated. You can change the displayed attributes at any time.
1. Select the Parameters tab in the Microseismic Console and click Attributes to display.

2. All loaded and calculated attributes are listed and checked. The source of each attribute
is displayed in the Calculated column:
• No = the attribute is from the original loaded file.
• Yes = a calculation was applied to one of the original attributes and saved as a new
attribute.
Uncheck the attributes you do not want to display. If an attribute is unchecked, it will not
appear in the list of attributes available on the 3D Attributes tab. If you will not be filtering
by an attribute, or using it as the color or size control, you may want to uncheck it here.
In the figure above, the loaded attributes are listed first followed by four calculated attributes.
In this example, the loaded XYZ values were corrected to match the XYZ values in the
Kingdom project. In addition, a correction was made to the Z for a mistie correction.
Delete calculated attribute—click the x beside a calculated attribute to delete that attribute.
You can only delete calculated attributes. You cannot delete attributes from the loaded point
set.
Managing treatment curves

The Treatment Curves Management sub-tab under Parameters includes options to:
• Select which attributes to list in the 2D Crossplot
• Delete treatment curves
The two required fields, stage and timestamp, are always listed and cannot be deleted.
However, if you decide not to include certain curves in your analysis, you can either turn them
off by clearing the Selected box, or delete them by clicking on the x beside the curve name.

Another option when loading treatment data is to select a subset of curves to load.
Related topics

Configuring your Microseismic workspace

A number of options are available to customize your 3D and 2D workspace:
• 3D crossplot display options
• 2D crossplot formatting options
• Selecting color and size for point set display
3D crossplot display options

Open and close the 3D crossplot by clicking the Select Views icon in the Microseismic
toolbar.
Before analyzing your microseismic point set in the 3D Crossplot or other views, customize
your crossplot display through general display options.
Click the Display Options icon in the upper right corner of the Microseismic Toolbar.
The following options are available:
• Selection highlight—when you select points from your point set display, the selected
points are highlighted. The default highlight color is red.
• Background color—select a background color for the 3D Crossplot. The default
background is light gray.
• VSD Corridor—when viewing the point set on a VSD, you can select the distance
perpendicular from the VSD that you want to include in the display. The default distance is
500 feet - 250 feet each side of the vertical slice. Move the slider bar to the left to narrow
the corridor and to the right to widen the corridor.
The maximum distance is 10,000 feet. If you want a distance greater than 10,00 feet,
enter the value in the field to the right of the slider. The VSD will update to the entered
value. The slider will remain at the maximum point.
• Volume Type—three volume displays are available:

- Data aligned bounding box—the bounding box is aligned to the points and usually
appears as a parallelepiped (a three-dimensional figure formed by six
parallelograms).
- Axis aligned bounding box—the bounding box is aligned to an axis and is a cuboid
(three pairs of rectangles - a rectangular box).
- Shrink Wrap—a convex hull shrink wrap which defines the smallest volume for the
points.
See also Displaying subset BFP and calculated volumes.
• Sphere resolution—controls the look of the displayed points (events). Decreasing the
resolution improves performance.
Maximum resolution produces shiny, spherical points. Move the slider to the left to
decrease the resolution. At a minimum resolution, the points appear box-like.
2D crossplot formatting options

The 2D Crossplot formatting options apply to both the plotted treatment curves, and the
General 2D Crossplot.
• Treatment Curve Crossplot—select the Treatment Curves tab in the Microseismic
Console. If you have not loaded your treatment data yet, see Graphical analysis tools.
• General 2D Crossplot—click the 2D Crossplot icon in the Microseismic toolbar.
With your crossplot displayed, you can customize your display by selecting your crossplot
settings. Settings are selected, entered manually, or turned ON/OFF.
When a setting is turned OFF or is set to Auto, related setting controls will be disabled.
Note: Settings that do not apply to the selected crossplot may have no effect. For example,
the point color for the generic 2D crossplot is controlled by the selected attribute.
Therefore the point color in the Format Curve dialog box will not affect the point
display.
Right-click on the following areas of the crossplot to format the settings.

Chart— options include margins, chart fill, and plot fill.
Axis—numerous formatting options are available. The horizontal and vertical axes can have
different settings. Right click on each to format.
Curve—specify settings for the displayed treatment curves (attributes).
Save/Load Settings—crossplot settings can be saved as a *.xpt settings file and then
applied or Loaded to other 2D crossplots displaying treatment data. See Use Saved
Crossplot Settings.

Save image—save the 2D crossplot as a .bmp image. In the Save as dialog box, browse to
a location and enter a file name.
Crossplot color settings

For Crossplot color settings, turn the color option ON and select from the list of 141 colors.
Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll up and down the list.
Format crossplot chart

To access the Format Chart dialog box, right-click anywhere in the chart or plot area and
select Format Chart. Right-clicking on a curve (Format Crossplot Curve) or axis (Format
crossplot Axes) will open their respective format dialog boxes.

Available chart settings are listed in the table below.
Title Change the title of the current crossplot. The title is not saved in the settings
file.
Margins Adjust the distance between the graph border and the outer edge of the chart.
Chart Fill Select a fill color for the area outside of the graph or actual plot.
Plot Fill Select a fill color for the background of the graph or actual plot

Format crossplot Axes

To access the Format Axis dialog box, right-click anywhere on the vertical or horizontal axis
area and select Format Axis.
Note: Right-clicking the general chart area (Format crossplot chart) or a curve (Format
Crossplot Curve) will open their respective format dialog boxes.
Available axis settings are listed in the table below.
Title Change the title of the current crossplot. The title is not saved in the
settings file.
Title Color Select a color for the title text. The title color is saved in the settings file.

Range Select to set the range of the axis manually or allow the application to set
it automatically according to the range of your data.
If more than one Y axis is displayed, each axis can have unique settings.
Tick marks Select to set the tick mark interval manually or allow the application to set
it automatically according to the range of your data. If you select Auto,
the Interval and Position fields will be inactive.
Major interval Beside Tick marks select Manual.

and Position Enter a value for the major interval.
Select one of the following positions for the major interval mark on the
axis: across, outside, inside, or none.
Minor interval Beside Tick marks select Manual.

and Position Enter a value for the minor interval.
Select one of the following positions for the minor interval mark on the
axis: across, outside, inside, or none.
Grid lines Select the visibility and color of the major and minor grid lines.
Major and minor grid lines align to the major and minor tick marks and run
across the crossplot area. By default, major grid lines are visible and light
gray. The minor grid lines are off, or not visible.
When multiple treatment curves are plotted, each Y axis has its own grid
lines aligning to the tick marks on that axis.
Label Select a color and angle for the axis labels. An axis label is the number or
date beside the major tick marks. Minor tick marks do not have labels.
The default colors are as follows:

The first attribute plotted = orange
The second attribute plotted = blue
The third attribute plotted = green
X axis labels are black
The default angles are as follows:
Y axis = 0 = horizontal
X axis = horizontal
Line Select a color and thickness for the axis line. The default colors are the
same as the axis labels. The default thickness is 1.
Format Crossplot Curve

To access the Format Curve dialog box, right click anywhere on the curve or point and select
Format Curve. Available curve settings are color, thickness, pattern, and data points.

Note: Right clicking on the general chart area (Format crossplot chart) or an axis (Format
crossplot Axes) will open their respective format dialog boxes.
You can plot up to four

treatment curves at one
time. Each curve can
have its own color,
thickness, and pattern
setting.
The default thickness is
1.25 for all curves. The
default pattern is solid.
Available patterns are
none, solid, dash, dot,
and dashdot.
Other format curve options include the following:

• Data Points—plot the actual data points. By default this setting is off. When the data
points setting is on, you can select color and size. The default color is black and the
default size is 6 for all curves.
• Decimation level—reduce the number of data points used when plotting the treatment
data if there are more than 10,000 points in your data set. By default, the decimation level
is set to high (the far right of the slider.) to optimize performance.
Use Saved Crossplot Settings

If you have customized and saved your crossplot settings, you can select to use these
settings on crossplots you display. Settings are saved as a *.xpt settings file. See Graphical
analysis tools.
To apply or load crossplot settings to a single active crossplot, right click on the crossplot
area, select Load Settings and Browse to your *.xpt crossplot settings file.

IHS Kingdom recommended format for Microseismic data
IHS Kingdom recommended format for Microseismic

data
This document is intended to provide guidelines for generating a text file or an Excel
spreadsheet format for importing passive seismic (microseismic events) into Kingdom. While
we can read almost all formats, the following recommendations will make the import process
much easier.
• Naming conventions for required fields
• File format
• Example format 1: Big_Oil_Co_Mywell_#4H_MSE.txt
• Example format 2: Midsized_Oil_Co_BigGas_#1Lat_MSE.xlsx
Naming conventions for required fields

If the required fields are recognized by Kingdom, loading is greatly simplified. We suggest
using one of the listed names for these fields. Surface location and depth are only required
for Microseismic event data. Attribute names must stay the same for subsequent files.
Tip: As a best practice, avoid spaces in attribute names.
Field Comment Recognized Names
Surface Surface location can be in one of three formats: XY

location Project X Y coordinates, DX DY from a DX DY
reference well, or latitude, longitude.
Easting Northing
Latitude Longitude
Lat Long
Depth Depth will be converted to TVD in feet or meters Depth

if loaded in as subsea. Z
Z-Depth

Date / The Date/Time data can be one column or two. Date

Time Separate Date and Time columns are preferred. Time
Timestamp (date and
We support most date formats: time)
US: MM/DD/YY or MM/DD/YYYY Jobtime
Europe: DD/MM/YY or DD/MM/YYYY Hour
Day
Time format: hh:mm:ss
A start date/time can also be part of the file

name or included in the rows above the header
row, but this adds some steps to loading.
Stage Stage as the column header with a number in Stage

the column. For single stage files, loading is
easier if you have the stage as a column–but it
is not required.
The stage data must be an integer with no other

text. For example, 1.006 or ST_1 are not
supported.
For single-stage files, the stage can be part of

the file name or included in the rows above the
header row.
See also File format and two examples:

File format
Consistent naming conventions will greatly facilitate the loading and management of
microseismic data. See Naming conventions for required fields.
Tips and requirements

• Typically files have 4-8 rows of information at the top of the file that is useful to the user
but is not read by the application.
• Rows above the header row. The first character in these rows is often # or /. Kingdom
does not read this information. These rows could ideally contain the well information:
• Frac Job well or source of the events:
- Well name and UWI
- Field name if passive reservoir monitoring

- Area name if passive earthquake event monitoring

• Reference well/well that the events are processed to/referenced from:
- Well Name and UWI
- Well location in latitude/longitude or X/Y
- If X / Y, include the coordinate reference system it was processed in.
- Well Reference Datum (i.e. KB)
• The header row should be a single row with column titles that do not contain spaces (no
header identifier preferred). Use underscores for spaces in column (attribute) names (i.e.
Event_Magnitude).
• The actual data should immediately follow.
• Text files or Excel files are supported.
• Text Files—tab (*.txt) or comma (*.txt or *.csv) delimited. We currently do not handle
constant or fixed column files that use space as a delimiter. We can read space
delimited files if the column names do not have spaces.or space delimited.
• Excel Files—2007 or newer version (.xlsx) only. We do not read .xls files.
See also the following examples:
Example format 1: Big_Oil_Co_Mywell_#4H_MSE.txt

# Microseismic data: Acquired and Processed by Modern Microseismic Geophysical Inc.
# Frac Well: Well name and Number UWI: nnnnnnnnnnnn
# Reference Well: Well_Name and Number UWI: nnnnnnnnnnnn
# Reference Elevation: nnnnnn X:nnnnnnn.nnY:nnnnnnn.nn
# Time Stamp Format:MM/DD/YYYY
Shear_
Date Time Stage DX DY Depth Magnitude
Azimuth
12/14/ 20:50:1 1 110.5 - 11241. 0.003479 123.65

2010 0 0 45.34 45
12/14/ 20:52:0 1 - 345.8 10998. 0.014536 89.32

2010 9 65.54 7 65
12/15/ 06:23:3 2 354.6 - 11798. 0.000836 256.79

2010 8 7 98.76 45

Example format 2: Midsized_Oil_Co_BigGas_#1Lat_MSE.xlsx

/Acquisition
New MS Inc
/Frac Well BigGas 1Lateral UWI 999999998
/Reference Well BigGas 1Pilothole UWI 999999999
/Reference Datum 567.4 X: Y88876.54 Depth is subsea
(GL) 45678.88
/Timestamp Format DD/MM/YY
Date Time Stage Latitude Longitude Depth(ss) Magnitude Confidence
22/03/08 18:45:45 1 89.345678 132.123456 -654.32 -1.03267 0.67
9 7
22/03/08 18:49:06 1 89.345654 132.123432 -587.65 -0.00346 0.34
3 1
22/04/08 09:13:40 2 89.345567 132.123454 -702.01 -0.01234 0.56
8 3

Visualization Menu
In the Visualization menu you can select the areal extents of the viewing area and the vertical
bounds in time or depth. Printing options are included, as well as the ability to close the
window and exit the project.
With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Visualization to display the following menu items:
Select Viewing Area Define the areal extent (including which surveys to display)
and the vertical bounds of the viewing area within the VuPAK
workspace.
Cube Time/Depth Range Define the start and end time (or depth) for the viewing area
within the VuPAK workspace.
Print options Includes standard Preview, Print, and Setup options.

Selecting the VuPAK viewing area

Visualization > Select Viewing Area
In the Select Viewing Area dialog box you define the areal extent (including which surveys
to display) and the vertical bounds of the viewing area within the VuPAK workspace.
1. Complete the Select Viewing Area dialog box as follows to define a viewing area:
• Extents—select the criteria for the areal extent of the viewing area. The fields that
appear on the right side in the Extents area depend upon on the option selected.
- Single 3D survey—select this option to select the 3D survey to use in defining
the viewing area within the VuPAK workspace.
- 3D Survey—select one of the available 3D surveys for the project.
- Inline Minimum and Maximum—post the inline (L) values for the selected 3D
survey. Modify these values to further limit the areal extent of the viewing area.
- Crossline Minimum and Maximum—post the cross-line (T) values for the
selected 3D survey. Modify these values to further limit the areal extent of the
viewing area.
- Add Gather Offset—check this box to display the gathers in the AVOPAK Gallery.
- Digitize from Base Map—click to digitize two corners of the rectangular area
within the selected 3D survey using a base map window. The cursor changes to a
crosshair with a D in the upper right quadrant . Single click once on the base

map to begin drawing the rectangle, then drag the cursor to the lower right corner
of the area to select. Single click again to end digitization. The rectangle will
highlight in red on the base map. The Minimum and Maximum fields update with
the inline and crossline bounds of the digitized rectangle.
Tip: With the red rectangle displayed on the base map, click anywhere on the red outline and
drag to a new location on the base map. The viewing area in VuPAK will update to the
new location when you release the mouse.
- Defaults—click to revert to the Minimum and Maximum inline and Crossline

values from the original survey extents. The base map window updates
immediately.
- Project bounds—select this option to use the boundaries of the project to define
the viewing area within the VuPAK workspace.
- X Minimum and Maximum—post the X values for the selected 3D survey. Modify
these values to further limit the areal extent of the viewing area.
- Y Minimum and Maximum—post the Y values for the selected 3D survey. Modify
these values to further limit the areal extent of the viewing area.
- Add Gather Offset—check this box to display the gathers in the AVOPAK Gallery.
- Digitize from Base Map—click to digitize two corners of the rectangular area
within the selected 3D survey using a base map window.
- Defaults—click to revert to the Minimum and Maximum inline and Crossline
values from the original survey extents. The base map window updates
immediately.
Note: For more information, refer to the topic Automatically reloading a moved view
frame.
- Selected surveys—choose this option to select the surveys in the project to use
in defining the viewing area within the VuPAK workspace.
- Survey list—select a survey. After selecting multiple surveys, a rectangle defining
the boundaries of the surveys appears on the base map. The bounding rectangle
may be adjusted by moving the red rectangle on the base map with the cursor.
- Add Gather Offset—check this box to display the gathers in the VuPAK
workspace.
• Vertical Bounds—set the time or depth values of the viewing area in the VuPAK
workspace.
- Time or Depth—specify the vertical units. If Depth is selected, TVD (Seismic)
and Subsea radio buttons activate so you can choose between display types. Z
units are in parentheses.

- Start Value—display the shallowest time or depth value to be displayed in the

VuPAK workspace. Modify this value with a typed entry into the start value
window.
- End Value—display the deepest time or depth value to be displayed in the VuPAK
workspace. Modify this value with a typed entry into the end value window.
• Startup—specify how to display data within the VuPAK workspace.
- Reload last session—All the horizons, faults, wells, grids, logs, and contours that
were visible in the previous VuPAK session are remembered and displayed in the
new session.
- New VuPAK session opens the application as an empty VuPAK workspace.
Once the VuPAK window is activated, choose the objects to display.
2. Click OK. The VuPAK workspace appears using the options selected.
Note: If you right click on a VSD and select the option to display it in VuPAK, VuPAK
maintains the depth type of the VSD regardless of any prior VuPAK settings.

Automatically reloading a moved view frame

To automatically reload a moved view frame in VuPAK, follow these steps.
1. From the Kingdom main menu, choose Project > VuPAK.
The Select Viewing Area dialog box opens.
2. Select either Single 3D survey or Project bounds.
3. Click Digitize from Base Map. The Digitize from Base Map option is used to digitize two
corners of a rectangular viewing area within the selected project on the base map
window.
The base map becomes active and the cursor changes to a D in crosshairs.
4. In the base map, click the upper left area to be digitized. The View Frame appears.
5. Move the mouse until the View Frame encompasses the area to be selected.
6. Click to end digitization. The borders of the View Frame turn red as shown in figure below.
Figure 1 View Frame in a Base Map

The above figure illustrates creating a View Frame within a survey. The blue dashed lines
indicate the border of original survey. The red rectangle indicates the initial area
designated as a View Frame; the black outlined rectangle shows a drag and drop action,
relocating the View Frame within the original survey.
After the area within the View Frame has been interpreted, you can drag and drop the
View Frame to a new location within the survey on the base map window. This
automatically reloads the newly positioned View Frame and allows interpretation to
continue throughout the survey, expanding the visualization area and the interpretations,
until interpretation over the entire survey is completed.
7. Complete the other fields as needed on the Selecting the VuPAK viewing area.
8. Click OK.
9. Click the Display Seismic Object(s) icon.
The Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box appears.

10. Complete the dialog box as follows:

• Available 3D Surveys—select a survey.
• Available Data Types—double-click the one of more data types or highlight the data
type and click > to move the selected data types to Selected Surveys/Data Types.
Note: The SuperScope Dimensions are confined to a restricted area. This area
was determined by the Digitize from Base Map option.
11. Click OK.

The data within the View Frame will be displayed in the VuPAK workspace.
Data moving rules

The following rules apply when moving data.
• The data types used in the previous working area will be loaded in the new area if
available.
• The data will be loaded in the entire View Frame if available.
• The display mode will be maintained for each data type as long as the data is in the same
survey.
• When encountering a new survey:

- If there was only one survey before the move, then all of the same data types that
were previously loaded will be loaded into the new View Frame if available. The same
display modes will also be maintained.
- If there were multiple surveys in the previous View Frame, then all of the same data
types that were previously loaded will be loaded into the new View Frame if available,
but they will be loaded in Volume Animation display mode.

Defining project time/depth range

Visualization > Cube Time Range
To define a project time/depth range, follow these steps.
1. From the VuPAK menu, click Visualization > Cube Time Range.
The Define Project Time or Depth Range dialog box opens. This dialog box defines the
start and end time (or depth) for the viewing area within the VuPAK workspace.
The domain depends on the Vertical bounds selection from the Select Viewing Area
dialog box.
2. Complete the Define Project Time Range dialog box as follows:
• Start(s)—enter the selected starting time or depth. The Z units are displayed in
parentheses.
• End(s)—enter the selected ending time or depth. The Z units are displayed in
parentheses.
3. Click OK. The volume displayed in the VuPAK changes according to the criteria entered.


View Menu
Overview
The View options control the VuPAK workspace settings, including zooming in and out,
displaying the highlighted box, controlling the orientation, exaggeration, projection, and scale
of the viewing area. Also, the tool bars are accessible from this menu and the window or
montage may be copied.
With the VuPAK workspace active, the View menu includes the following:
Settings Specify settings for display options (projection, methods, and

background color), and slice skip increments.
Rendering Strategy Control parameters for horizon and grid display that affect
rendering speed and resolution.
Zoom In Enlarge the view of a specified area of the display. The cursor
changes to a magnifying glass. Keyboard shortcut is F9.
You can also zoom in by using the thumbwheel control at the
bottom right of the VuPAK workspace.
Zoom Out Decrease the size of the enlarged view of the display and return
to the scale of the view immediately prior to the last zoom.
Keyboard shortcut is F10.
You can also zoom out by using the thumbwheel control at the
bottom right of the VuPAK workspace.
Orientation Orient the view from one of seven directions without altering any
of the display objects.
Stretch Exaggerate the display in the XY, X, Y, or Z direction.
Projection Switch between the parallel and perspective view. Projection

may also be selected by choosing View > Settings > Display
Options.
• Parallel—displays the parallel bounding edges of the cube
parallel to each other and with the same dimensions.
• Perspective—displays the parallel edges of the cube
converging away from the viewer, producing the illusion of
depth perspective. Perspective is especially helpful when
using a stereo viewer.

Amplitude Scale Boost the amplitude and gain on seismic trace displays. The
amount of amplitude scaling can be adjusted by choosing
Project > User Preferences > General and changing the
Seismic Display Scale Factor.
• F5 increases the amplitude values
• F6 decreases the amplitude values
• F4 resets to the original
VuPAK Toolbars Turn the various tool bars on and off.
Copy Montage to Copy the Kingdom’s window montage to the clipboard to transfer
Clipboard to other applications for further editing and/or printing.
Copy Active Window Copy only the VuPAK workspace to the clipboard to transfer the
to Clipboard graphics in the single VuPAK window to other applications for
further editing and/or printing.

Change VuPAK Display Settings

View > Settings
To change the display settings in VuPAK, follow these steps:
1. With the VuPAK workspace active, choose View > Settings.
You can also click (the VuPAK Display Settings icon) to access the VuPAK
Display Settings dialog box.
2. Update the tabs in the VuPAK Display Settings dialog box:
• Display Options—set the background color, scale, projection, and the viewing method
for the VuPAK workspace.
• Traces—set the line and slice skip increment values.
• Gathers—modify the width of the gather display. The initial display is set to match the
trace spacing of the volume.
• VuPAK Preferences—set display, rendering, and file options for VuPAK.
3. Click Apply after changing the fields in a tab before clicking the next tab.
4. Click OK after you have made all the changes.

Display Options tab

View > Settings > Display Options tab
Use the Display Options tab to set the background color, scale, projection, and the viewing
method for the VuPAK workspace.
The tab includes the following items:

• Background color—click to open the Color dialog box and select the background color
from the color palette.
Note: Annotation colors can be affected by a change in background color. Default black text
does not show against a dark background color. As the background color is changed
from a light color to a dark color (or vice versa), the black and white annotation
automatically flips. Any annotation or item that is not displayed in black or white
remains unchanged. You may need to manually change some settings after a
background color change.
• View Stretch Increments—set the increment amount for zooming in the X, Y, and Z
directions. The default value is 0.25. This value is a percentage of the absolute scale.

• Absolute scales—set the absolute scale for data displayed in VuPAK. This determines
the initial display scale for anything you display in VuPAK. For example, an absolute scale
value of 1 displays content at a normal scale. An absolute value of 2 displays content at
twice the normal scale, and a value of .5 shows content at half the normal scale. This
value overrides the maximum value allowed through incremental stretching.
• Projection method—control the VuPAK workspace perception.
- Parallel—select to display the bounding edges of the cube parallel to each other and
with the same dimensions.
- Perspective—select to display the parallel edges of the cube converging away from
the viewer, producing the illusion of depth. This is especially helpful when using a
stereo viewer.
• High-resolution seismic display (requires hardware support)—high-resolution
seismic display is a bilinear interpolation process that applies a color map after
interpolating amplitudes.
- Automatic—select to automatically use high resolution seismic displays.When
selected, VuPAK sends a query to check your PC and determine if the video driver
and video card can support the use of high resolution displays.
Note: A video card purchased prior to January 2004 is probably not sufficient to
support high resolution seismic displays.
- Yes—select to force the use of high resolution seismic displays regardless of whether
or not the system video components are sufficient.
- No—select to not use high resolution seismic displays.
• Orientation axes—select this option to display the orientation legend in the VuPAK
workspace, as shown in the figure below.

Traces tab
View > Settings > Traces tab
Use the Traces tab to set the line and slice skip increment values for vertical seismic
displays. These settings apply only to vertical seismic displays. To adjust increments for 3D
seismic surveys, see Animation Toolbar.
• Inline/Crossline increment—enter the number of traces for the vertical seismic display
to scroll each time the left or right arrow keys are used. This applies to inlines, crosslines,
and arbitrary lines.
• Time slice increment—enter the amount of time or depth in Z units for the seismic time/
depth/ slice display to scroll each time the up or down arrow keys are used.
Tip: Time or depth slices can be displayed faster by storing slice volumes for the data types
to be scanned in this manner. From an active base map, choose Surveys >
Generate Slices.
Gathers tab
View > Settings > Gathers tab
Use the Gathers tab to modify the width of the gather display. The initial display is set to
match the trace spacing of the volume.
• Gather horizontal aspect ratio—enter a ratio that applies a multiplication factor to the
width of the display based on the original width. The initial display is set to match the trace
spacing of the volume. If you assign an aspect ratio of 2, the width of the display will be 2
times the original width. Likewise, if you assign an aspect ratio of 0.5, the width will be
one half the original width.
VuPAK Preferences tab

View > Settings > VuPAK Preferences tab
Use the VuPAK Preferences tab to set display, rendering, and file options for VuPAK. The
VuPAK Preferences dialog box contains the following elements:
Open in Kingdom Geophysics and VuPAK

• Vertical sections—If VuPAK is open, displays any seismic lines, correlation sections,
and cross sections opened in Kingdom Geophysics in the VuPAK workspace as well.
Also, any change to the data type is synchronized between Kingdom Geophysics and
VuPAK, and if you rotate a cross section on a well in VuPAK the VSD is also updated.
• Time/Depth Slices—If VuPAK is open, displays any slices in opened in Kingdom
Geophysics in the VuPAK workspace as well.

Show
• Cursor position—display the 3D cursor in the VuPAK workspace. Place the cursor in the
base map window or on a Vertical Seismic Display (VSD) window to see the 3D cursor
tracking in the VuPAK workspace.
• Gathers in new gallery—open gathers in a new AVOPAK Gallery.
• Highlighted crossplot points—enable the display of crossplot points that are based on
crossplots of seismic or horizon data.
• Scanning bar—display the scanning bar on all displayed volumes.
• Stereo cursor in stereo mode—The stereo cursor appears when this option is turned
on. If you wear 3D glasses, the stereo cursor projects the mouse cursor into the cubic
volume enabling you to perceive the depth of the cursor. The cursor reverts to 2D when
you check off this option. The default is off.
• VuPAK boundary outline in base map—show a red outline around the viewing area
boundary on the base map.
OpenInventor rendering options

• Disable Volume Lighting—prevent lighting from affecting the volume.
• Display volume rendering only when cube is not moving—prevent the volume from
rendering while the cube is being panned, rotated, or zoomed.
• No interpolation for rendering—removes rendering artifacts caused by Kingdom
interpolating at the boundary between seismic data and null values in the data. This
results in a lower resolution image, but it can be used to review information on a sample-
by-sample basis.
• Transparency Mode—change the algorithm used to display all transparent objects in the
VuPAK workspace. Select from the following:
- Screen Door—uses a fill pattern to simulate transparency. This is the simplest,
fastest, but coarsest of the rendering techniques. This is the default transparency
technique, and is acceptable for most displays.
- Blend—rendering adds transparent objects to things already in the frame.
Transparency is computed in the order in which the objects are rendered.
- Delayed Blend—renders opaque objects first and transparent objects last. This
requires more time but provides greater realism.
- Sorted Object Blend—draws opaque objects first, then transparent objects. The
transparent objects are sorted by their distance from the viewer and are drawn from
back to front.Sorted Blended Transparency requires the most time but produces the
best results.

Change the view of the VuPAK volume

This section describes the various ways you can change the view of the VuPAK volume:
• Set Orientation of VuPAK volume
• Stretch VuPAK Display
• Manipulate the VuPAK volume in the Pick mode
• Manipulate the VuPAK volume using the Scanning Bar
• Animate the VuPAK volume
• Move to a specific Frame during animation
• Manually change data types within scope
• Automatically change data types within scope during animation
• Change the Volume display mode from the Tools menu
• Rotate the VuPAK volume
• Translate the VuPAK volume
• Reset the Home View
• Change center of rotation
Set Orientation of VuPAK volume

With the VuPAK workspace active, choose View > Orientation.
Figure 1 Orientation Mode
Then select one of the following:

• Home—reset the view from the southwest corner of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• Top—reset the view from the top plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• Bottom—reset the view from the bottom plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• North—reset the view from the northern side plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• South—reset the view from the southern side plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• West—reset the view from the western side plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.
• East—reset the view from the eastern side plane of the VuPAK workspace cube.

Stretch VuPAK Display

Exaggerate the display in the XY, X, Y, or Z direction. The stretch percentage in each
direction can be specified by choosing Project > VuPAK Preferences and changing the
View Zoom Increments in the X, Y, and Z directions.
• XY—stretch the image in the X and Y directions simultaneously.
• Reset XY—reset the image in the X and Y directions (enabled after the XY stretch has
been applied).
• X—stretch the image in the X direction.
• Reset X—reset the image in the X direction (enabled after the X stretch has been
applied).
• Y—stretch the image in the Y direction.
• Reset Y—reset the image in the Y direction (enabled after the Y stretch has been
applied).
• Z—stretch the image in the Z direction.
• Reset Z resets the image in the Z direction (enabled after the Z stretch has been applied).

Manipulate the VuPAK volume in the Pick mode

Follow these steps to manipulate the VuPAK volume in the Pick mode.
1. Displaying seismic object(s) in the VuPAK workspace.
On the AVI tool bar (Video Capture Toolbar), the selected survey appears in Survey
Selection and the selected data type appears in Volume Selection.
2. Click the Pick (arrow) icon on the Decoration tool bar.

3. Click a surface of the volume and hold the left mouse button down.
4. Drag the mouse in the direction you want to expand or decrease the volume.

Manipulate the VuPAK volume using the Scanning Bar

Follow these steps to manipulate the VuPAK volume using the scanning bar.
1. Turn on the scanning bar by selecting Show Scanning Bar on the VuPAK Preferences
tab in VuPAK Settings or right-clicking the volume and choosing Scanning Bar > Show.
2. Click the scanning bar and hold down the left mouse button; the scanning bar turns
yellow.
3. Drag the bar up or down to increase and decrease the SuperScope size.
Note: The scanning bar is not required to size the SuperScope and by default is not
shown.
4. To increase and decrease the size of the scanning bar, click one of the cubes and hold
down the left mouse button; the cubes turn yellow.
5. Drag the bar up or down to increase and decrease the size of the scanning bar.
6. To move the scanning bar to a new location, double-click on another point of the active
face in the animation (not one of the exterior faces).
7. Click on the intersecting lines in the base of the scanning bar and use the left mouse
button to control the angle of the face.
Note: For information about manipulating the scanning bar see Scanning Bar.
Animate the VuPAK volume

Follow these steps to animate the selected volume in the VuPAK workspace.
1. Display seismic objects in the VuPAK workspace. For more information, see Displaying
seismic object(s).
On the AVI tool bar, the selected survey appears in Survey Selection and the selected
data type appears in Volume Selection. For more information about the AVI tool bar, see
Video Capture Toolbar.
Table on page 118 lists the animation modes that can be used with the display modes
selected on the Displaying seismic object(s) dialog box.

Display Modes and Animation Modes
Animation Mode
Interactive Backward
Interactive Forward
Backward Once
Backward Loop
Forward Once
Forward Loop
Oscillating
Display Mode Notes
Slice animation x x x x x x x
Volume animation x x x x x x x
Oblique plane animation x x x x x The slider bar and clip

range are displayed for
this mode.
Chair cut animation x x x x x x x
Oblique cut animation x x x x x The slider bar and clip

range are displayed for
this mode.
Volume rendering x x x x x x x
animation
2. Click the appropriate animation icon to start the animation.

3. If you selected a loop animation, click the Pause icon to stop the animation.
Move to a specific Frame during animation

Follow these steps to move a specific frame during animation.
1. Start the animation using the steps in Animate the VuPAK volume.
2. Choose one of the following options:
• In Frame on the Animation Toolbar, move the slider bar to manually move to any
frame in the animation. The Slice Position Display displays the number of the Line
or Trace, or the value of the Time at which the animation slice is located during an
animation operation.
• In Slice Position Display on the Animation Toolbar, enter a specific number or
value and press Enter to move to that frame in the animation.

Manually change data types within scope

Follow these steps to manually change the data type of the active volume in the VuPAK
workspace.
seismic object(s).
On the AVI tool bar, the selected survey appears in Survey Selection and the selected
data type appears in Volume Selection. For more information about the AVI tool bar, see
Video Capture Toolbar.
2. To change the active volume, select one of the following actions:
• Click Survey Selection in the AVI tool bar and select another survey.
• Click the volume in the VuPAK workspace.
The active volume is outlined in yellow.
3. To change the data type, click Volume Selection in the AVI tool bar and select another
data type.
You can then use the Pick mode or the animation icons to scroll through the active
volume. For more information on using the Pick mode, see Manipulate the VuPAK volume
in the Pick mode. For more information on animating the volume, see Animate the VuPAK
volume.
Automatically change data types within scope during animation

Follow these steps to automatically change the selected data types in the VuPAK workspace
while viewing an animation.
seismic object(s).
You can select the following animation modes for the following display modes.

Animation Modes
Animation Mode
Interactive Backward
Interactive Forward
Backward Once
Backward Loop
Forward Once
Forward Loop
Oscillating
Display Mode
Slice animation X X X X X X X
Volume animation X X X X X X X
Oblique plane animation X X X X X
Chair cut animation X X X X X X X
Oblique cut animation X X X X X
Volume rendering X X X X X X X
animation
2. Choose View > Toolbars and check Animation to display the animation tool bar.
3. Right-click the seismic volume and choose Select Data Type.
The Select Data Type dialog box opens.
4. Select the data types to be displayed following the steps in Select Data Type.
The Animation Type field on the animation tool bar becomes active. For more
information, see Animation Toolbar.
5. In Inc. on the Animation tool bar, enter the number of increments to skip while viewing
the vertical displays and slices during scrolling on the VuPAK workspace.
6. Click one of the animation icons to start the animation. For more information, see
Animation Toolbar.
Note: If you click Forward Once or Backward Once, that animation may have already
been completed. Click another animation icon.
7. As the VuPAK workspace is scrolling through the display, you can click the following icons
and fields in the Animation tool bar to change the animation:
• Animation Type

• Inc.
• Volume
To change the survey, stop the animation first by clicking the Pause icon and then
selecting the surveying. Click one of the animation icons to start animation.
Change the Volume display mode from the Tools menu

Follow these steps to change the volume display mode from the Tools menu and animate the
volume.
seismic object(s).
2. On the AVI tool bar, select the survey and volume.
3. Choose Tools > Animation and then choose one of the following menu options:
• Slice Animation
• Chair Cut Animation
• Volume Animation
• Oblique Cut Animation
• Oblique Plane Animation
• Volume Rendering Animation
The Animation tool bar opens and the volume is changed to that display mode.
4. Click one of the animation icons to start the animation of the selected volume.
Rotate the VuPAK volume

To rotate the VuPAK volume, follow these steps.
1. Click the View (hand) icon.
The cursor changes to a hand shape.
2. Use the hand cursor to rotate the VuPAK volume in the required direction.
Note: You can also use the thumbwheel controls at the bottom left and left margin of the
VuPAK workspace to rotate the view. For more information, see Thumbwheel
Controls.
Tip: A keyboard shortcut is also available—Shift + S is available in View ( ) mode and

changes the cursor from a hand to a target ( ). Click on the point that you want to be
bring you to the focus. The image “flies in” to the center of the view. Then when you
rotate, the center of focus will be the point you clicked on the selected object.

Translate the VuPAK volume

To translate the VuPAK volume, follow these steps.
The cursor changes to a hand shape.
2. Use one of the following methods to translate the VuPAK volume.
• Hold down Shift or Ctrl and use the hand cursor to move the VuPAK volume left and
right or up and down in the VuPAK view.
• If you have a three button mouse or a wheel mouse, hold the middle button down or
hold the wheel down and move the mouse to shift the VuPAK volume.
Reset the Home View

To reset the home view, follow these steps:
1. Move the VuPAK volume to the preferred viewing angle.
2. Click the Home View icon.
Until you reset the home view, this is the view that will be used when the Home icon is
clicked.
Change center of rotation

To change the center of rotation, follow these steps:
2. Click the Set Focus icon.
The cursor changes to a crosshair.
3. Click the crosshair on an object or point in the VuPAK workspace to make it the new
center of rotation for the VuPAK cube.

Project Menu
The Project menu contains options to manage data at a project level. Once you have
launched Kingdom and opened or created a Kingdom project, the following option categories
are available:
• Display options
• Project management options
• Author (user) management and preferences
• Licensing and updates
See The Kingdom Project menu for a description of all options not unique to VuPAK.
See VuPAK Preferences tab for project settings unique to VuPAK.

Surveys Menu
The Surveys menu provides options to manage and annotate surveys; select lines and slices;
load, unload, and display volumes; adjust opacity; and control the volume scope and
rendering strategy.
With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Surveys to display the following menu
commands:
Survey Management Create, display, edit the properties of, order, delete, and
compare surveys within the project.
Data Type Management Manage data types for the project
Survey annotation Specify Application settings: Project Cube Annotation settings

settings and Survey Annotation settings.
Survey Annotations
Select Seismic Line Open the Select Vertical Display dialog box used to select
Select Seismic Line an arbitrary line, inline, crossline, or 2D line for display in the
VuPAK workspace
Selecting a horizontal Open the Select Time Slice dialog box used to select a time
slice or depth slice to display in the VuPAK workspace. Click List
Select Slice Data to display data information on selected surveys.
Displaying seismic Load and unload multiple 3D seismic volumes from the
object(s) VuPAK workspace.
Display Seismic Object(s)
Display Seismic Volume Display a loaded seismic volume in the VuPAK workspace. A
check () will appear when this feature is active.
Volume Opacity and Color Open the Opacity/Color Map dialog box used to load an
Bar existing opacity or color map for the volume or interactively
specify a custom opacity color map. Click Edit Color Bar to
open the Color Editor dialog box used to control the colors
with which to adjust the volume opacity.
SuperScope subvolumes Open the SuperScope submenu reset, select, save, rename,
SuperScope or delete a superscope.
Surface attribute scanning Open the Select Surface for Attribute Scanning dialog box
Surface Attribute used to drape the loaded seismic volume values onto
Scanning horizons, faults, or grids within the VuPAK workspace. The
traces are extracted along the time or depth of the horizon,
fault, or grid, thereby displaying seismic data in the shape of
the surface.

Generate Brick Volume Select survey and data type for the creation of a brick volume.
Microseismic Analysis Import, view, display, and analyze microseismic data in an

Microseismic integrated interpretation environment. This feature requires a
VuPAK Advanced (VuPAK + Kingdom Advanced) license.
Volume rendering Select indicate how the data is stored in Open Inventor/
methods OpenGL (a toolkit behind VuPAK 3D visualization).
Opening seismic lines from the base map

You can display inlines, crosslines, and 2D survey lines in VuPAK by right-clicking on the
base map and selecting an inline or crossline to display or right-clicking on a 2D survey line
and selecting Display 2D Line in VuPAK. When you open a 2D line in VuPAK, it will use the
data type selected for the most recently opened VSD. If no previous VSD has been opened,
VuPAK displays the 2D line with the default data type of amplitude (time).
Tip: To display only the intersection of horizons, grids, and faults on the 2D line rather than
the 3D surface, right click on the vertical section and select Display <object>
Intersection Only.

Application settings
Application Settings can be opened by the following:
• Surveys > Survey Annotation
• Application Settings icon on the Survey Cube Toolbar
Application Settings provide the following annotation options:
• Project cube annotation settings
• Survey annotation settings
Settings are selected, entered manually, or turned ON/OFF.
When a setting is turned OFF or is set to Auto, related setting controls will be disabled.
You can also turn all annotations on or off with a single click from the Application Settings
dialog box or from the Survey Cube Toolbar:
Project cube annotation settings

Project Cube Annotations are one of two general Application settings and can be opened by
one of the following in the VuPAK workspace:
• Surveys > Annotations

The following Project Cube Annotation settings can be turned ON or OFF:

• Display—turn all project cube annotations on or off. All existing settings will be retained.
- Labels—the surface extents and vertical bounds for your selected viewing area. If
this setting is off, the Text setting is disabled.
- Gridlines—project cube gridlines displayed according to intervals calculated
automatically from your minimum and maximum values, or displayed according to the
manual interval values entered.
- Text—if Labels are turned on, select the font and font size for the labels.
- Color—click the down arrow and select a color for the project cube annotations.
• Manual Interval—enter horizontal and vertical interval. The minimum and maximum
values are displayed to the left and right of the entry fields.
- Horizontal—correspond to the extents of the project cube. Enter an interval value for
the surface and floor gridlines.
- Vertical—correspond to the time or depth vertical bounds of the project cube. Enter
an interval value for the time or depth gridlines.
Survey annotation settings

Survey Annotations are one of two general Application settings and can be opened by one of
the following in the VuPAK workspace:

• Surveys > Annotations

VuPAK Survey Annotations are independent from survey annotations on your base map.
The following Survey Annotation settings can be turned ON or OFF:

• Display—Turn all survey annotations on or off. All existing survey settings will be
retained.
- Labels—the shotpoint, inline, and crossline numbers and line/survey names. If this
setting is off, the Text setting is disabled.
- Gridlines— the inlines and crosslines for 3D surveys.
- Text—the font and font size for the survey labels.
- Survey—the tab interface changes according to the choice of a 2D or 3D survey.
- Click the down arrow next to Survey and select the desired survey from a drop
down list.
- Shotpoint Start—select the starting shotpoint to be annotated
- Shotpoint Interval—select the interval or frequency of shotpoints to be annotated
by moving the slider or entering a number in the text field. For example, if you
enter 10, every tenth shotpoint will be annotated.

- Color—select a color for the survey annotations: labels, lines, and gridlines.
Display vertical seismic slices in VuPAK

Selection of 2D surveys in the VuPAK project tree as part of the current working set does not
automatically display the vertical seismic lines in the VuPAK window.
The following options are available:
• Select Vertical Display—Surveys > Select Seismic Line. Display VSD’s of 2D lines,
inlines, crosslines, or saved arbitrary lines.
• Displaying all 2D lines in the VuPAK working set
Tip: With a seismic 2D line or 3D survey active on the base map, or with a VSD open, you
can also right click the base map or VSD and select View <line, inline, crossline> in
VuPAK. VuPAK launches with the selected object displayed in the workspace and
maintains the depth type of the VSD regardless of any prior VuPAK settings.
Select Seismic Line

Surveys > Select Seismic Line
To view vertical seismic displays in the VuPAK workspace, follow these steps.
1. Open the Select Vertical Display dialog box using one of the following methods:
• From the VuPAK menu, choose Surveys > Select Seismic Line.
• Right-click outside of the VuPAK display and choose Select Vertical Display(s).
• In the VuPAK workshop, click the Select a Seismic Line icon .
Note: Survey Lines must be selected (turned on) in the Kingdom project tree to be
available for display. The project tree can be used to turn off individual 2D
survey lines after selection for display in the VuPAK workspace.


• Arbitrary Line (Across Surveys)—select an existing arbitrary lines within the
project.
• Survey—select a 2D line, a 3D inline, or a 3D crossline.
- Survey Name—select a 2D and 3D survey within the project. When you select a
3D survey, the 3D Surveys fields become active.
- 3D Surveys Inline—enter the 3D inline value. This field is disabled if a 2D line is
selected.
- 3D Surveys Crossline—enter the 3D crossline value. This field is disabled if a 2D
line is selected.
Range is an information line listing the range and increment of the inlines and
crosslines of the selected 3D survey. This field is empty if a 2D line is selected
• Data Type—select the corresponding data types available for the 2d or 3d survey or
arbitrary line selected in this dialog box.
3. Click OK. The selected vertical seismic displays appear in the VuPAK workspace.
Tip: To change the section data type, right-click and select Select Data Type.

Displaying all 2D lines in the VuPAK working set

Selection of 2D surveys in the VuPAK project tree as part of the current working set does not
automatically display the vertical seismic lines in the VuPAK window.
To show the vertical seismic displays of all 2D survey lines in the current working set:
1. Right-click outside the VuPAK volume and choose Display All 2D Survey(s) in the
VuPAK Working Set.
2. In Data Type, select the data type from the list of available data types.
Note: Each seismic survey can have multiple data types.
3. Click OK.
All of the survey lines that are in the current working set appear. The Kingdom project tree
can be used to turn off individual 2D survey lines after selection.

Selecting a horizontal slice
Selecting a horizontal slice

Surveys > Select Time (Depth) Slice
The Select Slice dialog box lists all options for managing surveys. In the Select Time (Depth)
Slice dialog box select a time slice or a depth slice, and a data type, and to access data
management information.
To select a time slice or a depth slice:

1. With the VuPAK workspace active, select Surveys > Select Time Slice.
The Select Time Slice dialog box opens.
Note: If Depth is specified as the domain or Vertical bounds in the Select Viewing
Area dialog box, then Surveys > Select Depth Slice is displayed as an option,
which opens the Select Depth Slice dialog box instead.

• Slice at Time—enter the value for the time at which to display a time slice.
• Slice at Depth—enter a value for the depth at which to display a depth slice.
• List Data—open the Data Type Management dialog box used to select desired
surveys and lists basic information about the selected survey(s) including vertical and
slice trace data types, sample ranges, file name location, number of samples per
trace, min, max, and mean values.
• Data Type—select the data types from the list. Each seismic survey can have multiple
data types.
• Omit 2D Lines—check to remove the 2D lines from the slice display. When
unchecked, the 2D lines also display slice data, if available.
3. Click OK to accept selections, load the data, and close the dialog box. The status is
displayed in the Loading Slice Data dialog box.

Displaying seismic object(s)

Surveys > Select Seismic Object(s)
In the Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box load and unload multiple 3D seismic volumes
for display in the VuPAK workspace, and to specify display mode and volume dimensions,
and whether to interpret in the volume or not.
Note: Settings for the Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box are persistent between
sessions.
To display seismic objects in the VuPAK workspace, follow these steps:

1. With the VuPAK workspace active, select Surveys > Display Seismic Object(s) to open
the Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box:
• Select Surveys > Display Seismic Object(s).
• Click the Display Seismic Object(s) icon .

• Right-click in the VuPAK workspace and choose Display Seismic Object(s).
The Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box opens.
Figure 1 Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box with bricked and unbricked data fields

Available display settings for each selected 3D survey and data type combination are the
following:
Display Mode VuPAK has six display modes. Select how to display the selected
volume before loading it.
SuperScope Define a subvolume by entering inline and crossline start/end

numbers and/or depth range. You can also select a saved
SuperScope volume.
If you are not using bricked data, you also define the bin
increment. An increase in the bin number decimates the volume.
The default values for brick data uses the relative inline/crossline/
time ranges of1/3-2/3 and places the object by default in the
middle of the volume of interest. The default for .1 data is the full
available range.
Disable interaction This option prevents interpretation on the selected volume. When
with this volume unchecked, the volume is available for horizon or fault
interpretation.

Total Memory Displays the estimated memory in megabytes required to display

Required the selected volume. This value dynamically updates with any
changes in SuperScope Dimensions. This only applies to data in
nonbricked format, which must be loaded into system memory to
be displayed. This does not apply to bricked data, which is
accessed directly from disk.
Display modes for seismic volumes

Select how to display the selected volume before loading it. Display capabilities depend on
your graphics card(s) that VuPAK is using (multiple graphics cards are required if VuPAK is
displayed across multiple monitors). At this point, the computer and graphics capabilities are
queried. Select each volume and then select its display mode.
Note: Animation display may be slow if your graphics card does not have texture memory
support.
Display modes include the following:
Slice Animation Inserts a single seismic display plane in the seismic volume
parallel to the X, Y, or Z-axis and automatically passes it
through the survey volume in a direction perpendicular to the
plane. You can select an inline, crossline, or time/depth slice.
Chair-cut Animation Inserts three seismic planes in the display parallel to the three
axes and automatically passes any one of the planes through
the survey volume in a direction perpendicular to the plane.
The exterior faces of the volume remain inactive with the
inserted planes active and available for horizon tracking and
fault picking.
Volume Animation Displays the seismic volume and automatically cuts through
the volume in one of the three axis directions (inline, crossline,
time/depth slice). One face can be moved past another face to
invert the volume.
Oblique Cut Animation Inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in the
seismic volume and automatically passes it through the
survey volume in a direction perpendicular to the plane. The
exterior faces of the volume remain displayed until the slice
passes through them.
Oblique Plane Animation Insert sa seismic display plane in any orientation in the
seismic volume and automatically passes it through the
survey volume in a direction perpendicular to the oblique
plane.

Volume rendering methods Displays the full volume of seismic data with user-defined
opacity settings. Data in nonbrick format is loaded into
contiguous system memory. Data in brick format is retrieved
directly from disk allowing dataset sizes greater than 2 GB
(gigabytes).

SuperScope subvolumes
Surveys > SuperScope
Use the SuperScope to create a subvolume from loaded volume(s) by interactively setting
the boundaries of visualization.
The active SuperScope is displayed within a yellow outline, or within a red outline when the
Pin Active Volume icon is tagged. The interpretation is constrained by the SuperScope box,
but is not fully constrained by fault surfaces, except in 2D Hunt mode.
Resetting SuperScope size

Choose one of the following options to reset the size of a SuperScope back to the original
size.
• With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Surveys > SuperScope > Reset.
• With the VuPAK workspace active, right-click a volume and choose SuperScope >
Reset.
The SuperScope displays the loaded volume at its initially loaded size.
Selecting SuperScopes
To select a SuperScope created and saved earlier in a VuPAK session:
1. Open the SuperScope Select dialog box:
• From VuPAK select Surveys > SuperScope > Select.
• In VuPAK, right-click a volume and select SuperScope > Select.
2. Select the SuperScope from the list. The dimensions are displayed.

3. Click Apply to display the SuperScope, or click OK to display the SuperScope and close
the Select dialog box.
Saving SuperScopes
To save a SuperScope:
1. Create the SuperScope.
2. Open the SuperScope Save dialog box.
• From VuPAK choose Surveys > SuperScope > Save.
• In VuPAK, right-click a volume and choose SuperScope > Save.
The Save dialog box opens.
3. In New or Existing Name, enter a unique name for the SuperScope or select an existing
SuperScope.
4. Click Apply to delete, or OK to delete and close.
The inline, crossline, and time/depth dimensions of the current SuperScope are saved in
the Kingdom project VuPAK session file.
Renaming SuperScopes
To rename a SuperScope:
1. Choose one of the following options.
• With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Surveys > SuperScope > Rename.
• With the VuPAK workspace active, right-click a volume and choose SuperScope >
Rename.
The Rename dialog box opens.
2. Select the SuperScope to be renamed. The current name appears in New File Name.
3. In New File Name, enter a new name for the SuperScope.
Deleting SuperScopes
To delete a SuperScope:
1. Display a SuperScope by following the directions in Selecting SuperScopes.
2. Open the SuperScope Delete dialog box.
• From VuPAK choose Surveys > SuperScope > Delete.
• In VuPAK, right-click a volume and choose SuperScope > Delete.
3. Select the SuperScope to be deleted.

Volume rendering methods
Volume rendering methods

The Volume Rendering Method menu indicates how the data is stored in Open Inventor/
OpenGL (a tool kit behind VuPAK 3D visualization).
There is a hierarchy of rendering methods. Video cards have an upper limit. The limit varies
based on the type of rendering mode and video card. Depending on how the onboard
memory is managed and used with each particular video card, you may hit a limit before the
volume size reaches the max onboard memory.
The two rendering methods for volume rendering are 3D Texture and 2D Texture. For most
video cards, 2D texture loads bigger volumes with a better performance.
- Auto—use the best mechanism available depending on the computer’s capabilities.
- 3D Texture—(TEX3D) slower than 2D Texture but generally provides a better image
quality. 3D textures use less texture memory, because three sets of 2D textures must
be loaded for each brick.
Note: For Auto and 3D Texture, some low-end boards report that 3D textures are
supported, but in fact the rendering is not hardware accelerated and is very
slow. VolumeViz is able to detect this situation and use 2D textures instead in
most, but not all, cases.
- 2D Texture—(TEX2D) provides the best performance (the default).

- Volume Pro—The VolumePro 500 does not support embedded geometry. If 3D
geometry is drawn inside the volume, the resulting image will generally be incorrect.
The VolumePro 1000 does support embedded geometry. The VolumePro 500 also
does not support perspective rendering. VolumeViz is able to generate an
approximately correct image, but in general the image is only correct when using an
orthographic camera. The VolumePro 1000 does support perspective rendering, but
VLI version 3.1 or higher DLLs must be used (VolumeViz version 4.0 and higher
installs the DLLs).
To improve further on volume size and performance, turn off lighting for volume rendering
(not for surfaces) by choosing Project > VuPAK Preferences and unchecking Disable
Volume Lighting.
Also by changing pixel depth, that is, the number of colors available, from 32-bit color to 16-
bit color, onboard memory may be conserved. When memory is allocated to hold volume, it
always uses a power of 2 dimension, that is, for a volume size of 513x513x513, if 3D texture
is used, internally it will allocate a memory size of 1024x1024x1024. A common question is
whether or not the VuPAK application uses video RAM exclusively, or switches over to
standard RAM once video RAM is used up. VuPAK doesn't control how memory and what
type of memory is used. This is managed by video cards, therefore is a card specific issue. A
lot of time, even if the video cards overflow to system memory, it will be much slower than that
from on-board memory. Another concern is whether there is an environment variable or flag
to enable standard RAM use by VuPAK. Again, this is video card specific. Usually, video card
makers provide an interface for users to modify certain settings. This can be found through
Start > Settings > Control Panel > Display > Settings > Advanced tab.

Surface attribute scanning

Note: A volume must be loaded with one of the five animation methods or volume rendering
as the Display Mode before this feature is available.
Your video card must also support 3D textures.
Use the Select Surface for Attribute Scanning dialog box to specify draping the loaded
seismic volume values onto horizons, faults, or grids within the VuPAK workspace. The traces
are extracted along the time or depth of the horizon, fault, or grid, thereby displaying seismic
data in the shape of the surface.
The scanning bar may then be used to scroll through the volume using the shape of the
surface. This is similar to the Oblique Plane animation mode, where the plane is in the
shape of an interpreted surface. The attribute scanning function is useful in examining
amplitudes against an interpolated fault surface.
The available seismic volumes are derived from the selections in the Display Seismic
Object(s) dialog box.
Multiple surfaces may be displayed. However, each surface may only be associated with one
loaded volume. For example, you can display a fault and a horizon using the same seismic
volume, whereas you cannot display two horizons using the same seismic volume.
Tip: Add a directional or point light to the workspace to help in viewing the scanned surface
attribute(s).
To specify draping the loaded seismic volume values onto horizons, faults, or grids within the
VuPAK workspace, follow these steps:
1. Display a seismic object by following the steps in Displaying seismic object(s).
2. Use one of the following methods to open the Select Surface for Attribute Scanning
dialog box.
• With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Surveys > Surface Attribute Scanning.
• In the VuPAK Seismic tool bar, click the Surface Attribute Scanning icon.


• Select the type of surfaces for attribute scanning.
- Horizon—list all the active author’s horizons within the project in Available
Horizon(s). A horizon may be associated with multiple loaded attribute volumes.
However, once a loaded attribute volume is selected, it may not be used for any
other horizons. The selected loaded attribute volume will only be available for
faults or grids at this point.
- Fault—list all the active author’s faults within the project in Available Fault(s). A
fault may be associated with multiple loaded attribute volumes. However, once a
loaded attribute volume is selected, it may not be used for any other faults. The
selected loaded attribute volume will only be available for horizons or grids at this
point.
- Grid—list all the active author’s grids within the project in Available Grid(s). A
grid may be associated with multiple loaded attribute volumes. However, once a
loaded attribute volume is selected, it may not be used for any other grids. The
selected loaded attribute volume will only be available for horizons or faults at this
point.
Tip: To select two or more different s, select the first surface and use the [>] button to add it
to the Selected Surface(s) field. Then select the radio button for a different and use the
[>] button to add it to the Selected Surface(s) field as well.
• Available Horizon(s)/Fault(s)/Grid(s)—select a surface.

• Loaded Attribute Volume(s)—select one volume and click > to move it to Selected
Surface(s). These are the seismic volumes that were loaded in the Display Seismic

Object(s) dialog box. Multiple volumes may have been loaded. The volumes are
represented by survey name / data type name.
Note: To deselect a selected surface, select the name in Selected Surface(s) and
click <.
To deselect all of the previously selected surfaces and volumes, click None.
• Selected Surface(s)—displays all of the surfaces/volumes that have been selected

for loading into the VuPAK workspace. Multiple surfaces may be loaded. The surfaces
are represented by: surface name: survey name / data type name. After a surface/
volume is added to Selected Surface(s), the loaded seismic volume no longer
appears in Loaded Attribute Volume(s) for that.
• Show Entire Surface—check to display the horizon, fault, or grid in its entirety in the
viewing area extent. If the loaded volume dimension is a subvolume of the viewing
area extent for the workspace, then the surface will appear white outside the volume
dimension. Since the volume is not loaded in that area, the volume values may not be
displayed, though the relative shape of the surface is still evident. When unchecked,
the surface only appears to the extent of the volume dimension.
• Sampling Increment in Bins—select how much of the surface to use in the display.
100% is the default and uses the entire surface. In the event of performance
problems, decrease this value using the slider bar
4. Click Apply to save the changes.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

In the example figure immediately above, results of Surface Attribute Scanning are
illustrated, and show a horizon surface and a fault surface draped with the traces from the
Amplitudes data set in the 3d Migration 3D survey. Information about the survey and data
set are shown in the status bar at the bottom of the window in the figure.

Opacity/Color Map
From the VuPAK menu, click Surveys > Volume Opacity and Color Bar or click the icon
to display the Opacity/Color Map dialog box.
The Opacity/Color Map feature is used to interactively set and adjust the opacity level and
color of seismic attributes within the volume. Opacity map files (*.fio files) and color map files
(*.CLB) can be saved and loaded.
A volume must be loaded to use this option. However, it does not need to be displayed.
• Attribute Value—the color scale, displayed as a horizontal bar at the bottom of the
histogram, consists of 256 bins and represents the range of attributes contained in the
volume. Moving the cursor along the color bar will display a readout of the volume
attribute values. Moving the black vertical bars located at either end of the color bar will
redistribute the color map. See Color Bar for details.
• Opacity—the levels of the opacity are displayed as a green line or curve whose values
range from 0.0 to 1.0 along the y-axis on the histogram. Adjust the Range of Opacity by
dragging the line across the histogram at various opacity levels.
• Histogram of the Amplitude Values—a specific color or shade of color and a specific level
of opacity is assigned to each binned seismic attribute value within the volume. The
numerical occurrence of the seismic volume attributes is depicted as a histogram with
vertical purple bars.

Below is an example of a multi-volume display using two different modes of display; a slice
animation and a volume animation with two different color scales and scanning probes
assigned to each volume.
The Opacity/Color Map dialog box has the following options:

• Opacity/Color map file menu options—options include the color bar, loading and saving
opacity, and managing the display parameters.
• Opacity control tools—tools used to interactively set and adjust the opacity level and color
of seismic attributes within the volume.
• Set Minimum and Maximum Values—specify a range of attributes to display.
• Adjusting the Opacity Curve and Histogram—graphically select which attribute values
within the volume are opaque or transparent using the Opacity Curve dialog box.
• Scrolling the Opacity Curve left or right—adjust an opacity curve by scrolling the curve
across the histogram. This is done by entering a step increment (1 to 50) and clicking on
the left or right arrows in the Opacity/Color Map dialog box.
• Make End Values Transparent to Isolate amplitudes—interactively isolate a small range
of attributes making them opaque without having to know and type in the exact range of
values.
• Expand Histogram—magnify a portion of the volume attribute range graphically.
Histogram of the Amplitude Values

Histogram is a graph displaying the range of volume attributes along the x axis and
frequency of occurrence along the y-axis. Vertical histogram bars (purple) depict the

occurrence of values found in the mapped bins. Placing the cursor on a bin in the histogram
or on the horizontal color bar will display the value of the selected bin at the base of the dialog
box adjacent to the Attribute Value label. Attribute value precision is dependent on the bit
depth of the data loaded (i.e. 32-bit, 16-bit, 8-bit, etc.).
Note: By default values are computed from the min and max of the volume, so spikes
anywhere in the volume can severely distort the color bar mapping to the attribute
values. You may now specify an attribute value range to utilize the full 256-color range
available (254 colors if the extremes are transparent). The program divides the
attribute value range extents by 256 and utilizing the full 256-colors available will re-
bin or redistribute the volume attribute values over the new attribute range.
Range of Opacity
Interactively modify the opacity curve by holding down the left mouse button anywhere on the
graph and drawing a new line or curve through the histogram. Release the mouse button and
click Apply to view changes to the posted volume in VuPAK. Volume attributes will be
displayed in VuPAK at the designated opacity level of the line along the y-axis. If you have
selected an animated volume the opacity levels will only apply to the outside faces of the
volume.
• Opacity Values on the y-axis range from 0 to 1.0. An opacity setting of zero (0.0) will
render the volume as transparent and an opacity setting of 1.0 will render the volume as
opaque.
• Opacity Curve is used to vary the opacity level or transparency of the attributes
displayed in the VuPAK volume. You can interactively vary the opacity level by modifying
the green line or curve, which extends through the histogram. There are 100 levels of
opacity making the curve smoother.
Color Bar
Use the color bar to apply various color maps to the volume attributes. See Color Editor for
more information.
Color maps can be specified for the range of attributes using the Color Bar Editor . The
black vertical bars located on the horizontal color bar can be moved. Drag the black bars with
the left mouse button to stretch, squeeze or center the color scale across the range of
attributes. The color map between the vertical bars will be redistributed. The attribute value
associated with the bin located at the black vertical bars is always displayed below the bars.
This value is updated as the vertical bars are moved. Any volume attribute falling outside of
the vertical bars on the x-axis will be colored in the color under the bar.

Opacity/Color map file menu options
Opacity/Color map file menu options

In the VuPAK main menu, select Surveys > Opacity and Color Bar.
The Opacity/Color Map dialog box has the following File Menu options:
• Color Bar Editor—edit the current color bar or select a different color file to use in color
mapping the volume attributes.
• Load Opacity Map—choose the opacity file (*.fio), which contains the opacity limits.
Then click Open to complete the process. An open opacity file can be edited. The first
point of an edited line or curve must be on the displayed line.
• Save Opacity Map—overwrites the open *.fio file with the current opacity settings.
• Save Opacity Map As option —enter a file name and path for the new opacity file (*.fio).
Click Save to complete the process.
• Select Color Display Parameters —select, load and restore opacity levels and color
map settings created earlier in VuPAK and stored using the Save option described below.
To restore the color scale and opacity levels from an earlier volume visualization, select
the name you associated with the stored display parameters from the Select Save Scope
area and then select OK or Apply.
• Save Color Display Parameters —save the opacity levels and color scale settings
currently displayed in the Opacity/Color Map dialog box under the name entered in the
New or Existing Name text field. This file can be recalled later to set opacity levels and
color map settings.
• Rename Color Display Parameters—change the name highlighted to the name entered
in the New File Name text field. Specify a new name and then select OK. The new name
will now be associated with the color settings and opacity levels, replacing the old
Opacity/Color Map name.
• Delete Color Display Parameters—remove the highlighted Opacity/Color Map from the
VuPAK Project session file. A confirmation message will be issued, with a warning that a
deletion operation is irreversible.

Opacity control tools

In the Opacity/Color Map dialog box interactively set and adjust the opacity level and color of
seismic attributes within the volume. Opacity maps files (*.fio files) and color map files
(*.CLB) can be saved and loaded into the Opacity/Color Map dialog box. The icons located
on the Opacity/Color Map dialog box are described in the table below:
Icon Name Description
Opacity Causes a horizontal green line to be drawn at the top of the

displayed graph, indicating an opacity level of 1.0. Selecting
this button and clicking Apply or OK will display the volume
completely opaque. See Adjusting the Opacity Curve and
Histogram.
Transparent Causes a horizontal green line to be drawn at the bottom of

the graph, indicating an opacity level of 0.0. Selecting this
button and clicking Apply or OK will display the volume
completely transparent. See Adjusting the Opacity Curve and
Histogram.
Make End Sets the attribute values outside of the vertical black bars to
Values be transparent. Move the vertical black bars to the locations
Transparent on the histogram representing the attribute limits you wish to
image. Click Make Ends Transparent and then click Apply
or OK to activate the option.
If this option is not selected, attribute values that fall outside
the limits of the black vertical bars will be set to a constant
color, representing the end colors of the selected color scale.
See Make End Values Transparent to Isolate amplitudes
Set Minimum Launches the Set Minimum and Maximum Values dialog box
and in which you can specify a range of attributes to display.
Maximum
Values
Expand Magnifies a portion of the volume attribute range graphically.

Histogram This expanded histogram display is an approximate
representation of the original data re-binned using 256 new
color-attribute mappings over the limited attribute range
Undo Expand Returns the limits of the Opacity/Color Map to its last binned
Histogram extents. This icon will be inaccessible until the Expand
Histogram function is active. You will have to reload the 3D
volume to restore the full extents of the volume with Surveys
> Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box.

Color Bar Clicking on this icon invokes the Color Editor. Using this
Editor dialog box you can edit and store the current color scheme
on disk for the selection of a different color bar file previously
stored to disk.
Scroll Arrow icons allow scrolling the opacity curve across the
through histogram by specified bin increments. See Scrolling the
Opacity Opacity Curve left or right for more information.
Curve
Set Minimum and Maximum Values

Select Surveys > Volume Opacity and Color Bar or from the VuPAK icon bar click the
Manipulate Opacity/Color Bar icon from the VuPAK tool bar. Then click the Min/Max
icon to open the Set Minimum and Maximum Values dialog box shown below.
This dialog box allows you to enter attribute values specifying a gate over data represented
by the color scale and histogram. You can define whether the gated data is either completely
transparent or opaque, as well as lock down the color bar over the gated data.
You can limit data represented in the Histogram to an amplitude range specified in the
Histogram min and Histogram max text fields. If you select this option then input data is
limited to the specified range of data values. If the data range is a subset of a larger range of
attributes then the specified range of data is re-binned, the histogram is expanded to the
extents of the new range by distributing the values over the 256 bins, and the complete color
scale is used over the expanded histogram. You can use this option to eliminate spiky data or
to isolate attributes of particular interest.

Dialog box items for the Set Minimum and Maximum Values include:
• Opacity allows for typed entry of a range of data (a gate). You can set the opacity of the
gated data to either opaque or transparent.
• Opacity gate min specifies the minimum attribute value used in defining the opacity gate.
• Opacity gate max specifies the maximum attribute value used in defining the opacity
gate.
• Gate opaque renders the data within the range is rendered as completely opaque. If this
option is not selected the data within the specified range is rendered as completely
transparent.
• Lock color bar to visible data centers the color bar over the gated data.
• Histogram sets the minimum and maximum extent of volume attributes sorted into the
256 bins of the histogram display. These attribute values are mapped to the color scale
and opacity curve and used in volume visualization. Any data outside these limits is
eliminated from the loaded volume. To recover data outside the limits set by Histogram
min and Histogram max, reload the original data.
• Histogram min specifies the minimum value in the data binned and mapped to the color
scale. The original value listed in the text field is the minimum attribute value found in the
loaded volume.
• Histogram max specifies the maximum value in the data binned and mapped to the color
scale. The original value listed in the text field is the maximum attribute value found in the
loaded volume.
Altering these values can clip the data, causing data above or below these values to be
eliminated from the binning process.

Note: Clicking OK or Apply in this dialog box only alters the settings in the Opacity/
Color Map dialog box. You must click OK or Apply in the actual Opacity/Color
Map dialog box to apply the new settings to the volume.
Adjusting the Opacity Curve and Histogram

The Opacity Curve displays as a green horizontal line or curve in the Opacity/Color Map
dialog box. The Opacity Curve allows you to graphically select which attribute values within
the volume are opaque or transparent during visualization in VuPAK. You can use the opacity
settings to isolate or eliminate attribute values in a volume.
The level of opacity is not tied to the magnitude of the bins in the histogram. The level of
opacity is determined by the drawn opacity curve at any given point along the line of the
curve in the histogram. The level of opacity is listed on the left side of the histogram with one
hundred levels between 0.0 and 1.0. This range allows for finer adjustments across attributes
and a smooth opacity curve. An opacity setting of zero (0.0) renders the volume completely
transparent and an opacity setting of 1.0 renders the volume completely opaque.
Quick Opacity settings
You can quickly set the opacity curve to fully opaque or fully transparent with the Opaque and
Transparent icons.
Gradational Opacity settings

Click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the cursor over the histogram to set
the opacity curve levels. Click Apply or OK to view the results in VuPAK.

Gating Minimum and Maximum Values

You can enter minimum and maximum attribute values to define an opacity gate over
attributes of interest. You can set the gated attributes to display in the VuPAK workspace as
opaque or transparent.
To set minimum and maximum opacity and histogram values:
1. Click the min/max icon to open the Set Minimum and Maximum Values dialog
box.
2. Select Opacity.
3. Type in minimum and maximum attribute values into the available fields.
4. Select Gate opaque to render gated attributes as opaque and values outside the gate as
transparent. If this option is not selected the gated attributes are rendered as transparent
and values outside the gated range are rendered as opaque.
5. Select Histogram.
6. Enter the range of attribute values you wish to display on the Histogram. Histogram max
and Histogram min specify the maximum and minimum data values represented by the
color scale.
7. Select Lock color bar to visible data to set the color scale as centered on the gated
data.
In the example below, data having an attribute value between -7500 and -500 is set to be
opaque. All data outside this range is transparent. The color bar is locked so that the color

scale is centered on the visible data. The decimal values displayed on the histogram
represent the nearest binned value to the minimum and maximum input data values.
In the example below the gated data is rendered as transparent with all attributes falling
outside the gate rendered as opaque.

Scrolling the Opacity Curve left or right

Another option to adjust an opacity curve is to scroll the curve across the histogram by
entering a step increment (1 to 50) and clicking on the left or right arrows in the Opacity/
Color Map dialog box. The changes are immediately visible in VuPAK.

In the example below the step factor is 10. Clicking the left or right arrow increments the
opacity curve across the histogram every 10 bins. As you scroll across the histogram you can
view the resulting volume in the VuPAK workspace.
Note: The step function is the data extent between the minimum and maximum attribute
values +1/256 bins. The value of the step function can be increased from 1 to 50.


Zero Padded Volumes

When zero trace padding is used to regulate an odd shaped survey or pad from time zero
down to a zone of interest then the histogram will be biased toward zero. Amplitudes will
spike around zero and the histogram display will lose its bell shape curve.
If you magnify the histogram with the Expand Histogram feature in the Opacity/Color Map
dialog box then the zero crossing amplitudes are more noticeable as depicted in Figure 3.
Note: VuPAK only supports zero padded volumes. The examples of unpadded volumes
provided here are meant for illustration purposes only.
Figure 1 Unpadded Volume, from Time 0 to 3 seconds – Histogram over the entire attribute range
Figure 2 Zero Padded Volume, from Time 0 to 1.5 seconds—Histogram over the entire amplitude range.

Figure 3 Zero Padded Volume, from Time 0 to 1.5 seconds—

Expanded Histogram over amplitude range of –75 to +67

Make End Values Transparent to Isolate amplitudes

The Make End Values Transparent feature can be used to interactively isolate a small range
of attributes making them opaque without having to know and type in the exact range of
values.
Click the Opaque icon to render the volume opaque as shown below in the example.

Use the left mouse button to move the two vertical black bars over a narrow gate of attributes
as shown below.
Click the Opaque icon to isolate a small range of values (below).
Note that all values outside of the black vertical bars are set completely transparent.

Click Apply or OK to view the results in VuPAK.

Visualization of the volume is now restricted to attributes that fall in the range between the
black bars. This method can be used to isolate attribute values of particular interest.
Expand Histogram
Allows you to magnify a portion of the volume attribute range graphically. Click the Expand
Histogram icon. Click and release the left mouse button to mark the beginning of your range
then move the cursor over the attribute range of interest and click the left button to finish your
selection. The first and last points are marked with vertical bars as shown below. The
selected range of attribute values are expanded to the full width of the histogram over the 256
color mappings. The color bar, including the vertical black bars that define the minimum and

maximum color range will also be expanded accordingly. The opacity curve will remain
unchanged over the area.
When OK or Apply is selected a warning message is issued stating that the data will be re-
binned and that re-binning time is dependant on the size of the volume. The option to cancel
the operation is available.
Variable Histograms
The histogram display will lose its bell curve shape when you load various calculated
volumes, for example the Rock Solid Attributes, that contain attribute values which may not
be evenly distributed. The histogram depicts the occurrence of specific attribute values within
the seismic volume. The level of the opacity is not tied to the magnitude of the bins in the
histogram. The level of opacity is determined by the drawn opacity curve at any given point
along the line of the curve in the histogram. The level of the opacity setting is listed on the left
side of the histogram with one hundred levels between 0.0 and 1.0.
Below are examples of expanded histograms taken from an Amplitude volume and several
Rock Solid Attribute volumes.
Figure 4 Amplitude volume

Figure 5 Chaotic Reflection volume

Figure 6 Event Continuity volume
Figure 7 Envelope Modulated Phase volume


Culture Menu
Only culture layers composed of lines and text can be displayed in VuPAK. Graphics and
Shape files cannot. Culture layers can be displayed in both time and depth domains at a set z
value through the Culture Display Settings from the Culture menu, or can be draped on a
selected surface.
To display a culture layer at a set z value, turn on the layer in the active collection. The culture
displays at the surface level of the workspace. You can then move the displayed culture up
and down along the scanning bar in the 3D workspace:
1. Click on the displayed culture in VuPAK. The yellow scanning bar appears parallel to the
z axis.
2. Hold down your cursor and drag the culture up or down in the 3D workspace.
A second display option is Drape culture, available from the RMB Menu when right-clicking
on the displayed surface. This option drapes all visible cultures on the selected surface: grid,
horizon, or fault.
The VuPAK Culture menu also includes Culture Management where you can create, display,
edit the properties of, order, activate, copy, and delete culture groups within the project.

Culture Display Settings
Culture Display Settings

Culture > Culture Display Settings
In the Culture Display Settings dialog box specify the time or depth at which to display the
culture layer for the selected group, and specify extrusion and transparency parameters. The
domain of the settings correspond to the domain of the VuPAK workspace: time or depth.
Culture Display Settings include the following:
Layer Time / Depth Display the selected culture layer at one of the following z
values:
• Top
• Bottom
• Fixed—type a z value in time (sec) or depth (ft or m). If you
move the layer up or down in the workspace, this value
dynamically updates.
Display culture on slice Keep the culture layer displayed at the specified z value if you
when draping have also selected to drape the culture layer on a surface:
horizon, grid, or fault.
Enable culture extrusion Display culture lines or polygons as solid objects, like walls,
within a specified time or depth range. Enter time or depth
Start and End values to define the range.
Transparency Slide the bar to specify the transparency for the culture
extrusion. The culture layer remains opaque.
The figure below shows the culture layer displayed at 0 feet (Top) and culture extrusion
enabled. The culture outline appears as yellow walls through the full depth range.

Wells Menu
The Wells menu provides tools to select, query, and edit wells in the VuPAK workspace. With
the VuPAK workspace active, choose Wells to display the following menu items:
Select Wells to Display Select the working set of wells by By Query, or By List or
Polygon
Edit Wells Open the Edit Well Data dialog box used to adjust existing
well data.
Well Display Options Display well completions and/or perforations on wells.
Well Path Planner Plan and view well bore paths in VuPAK.
Related topics
Geology in 3D

Well Display Options

Use the Well Display Options dialog box to display well completions and/or perforations on
wells. You can specify what completions or perforations to display by interval, by start and
end depth, or by formation top range. You can specify what color to use for completions and
perforations and select the diameter of the cylinders representing perforations and
completions. You can also set the well label color and borehole display thickness.
The Well Display Options dialog box has two tabs:
• Display tab
• Properties tab
Well Display Options - Display tab

Wells > Well Display Options > Display tab
Use the Display tab of the Well Display Options dialog box to define whether to show
perforations and/or completions on the wellbore in VuPAK. You can define which completions
and/or perforations to display the following ways:
• By interval—If the well already has perforations and/or completions, select the ones you
want to display
• By depth—Show only those perforations and/or completions that occur within the
specified depth range
• By formation tops—Show only those perforations and/or completions that occur between
the specified top and bottom formation tops
The VuPAK status bar at the bottom of the VuPAK window displays the measured depth (MD)
value of any vertical or deviated well when you move the cursor along the length of the
borehole. This is useful in determining the depth range of any perforations or completions
you want to display.
You can specify these options for individual wells, a group of wells you select, or for all wells.
You can also indicate whether you want to display the well Name and/or number at the top of
each well borehole. This option applies to all wells.
The display of perforations and completions is specific to each well.
If you select one well, define the perforations and completions you want to display for that
well, and apply those changes, the perforations and completions defined for other wells are
no longer visible. To show perforations and completions for more than one well, you must
select all the wells in the list that you want, and then click Apply.
Note: If you turn on the display of perforations or completions on a well and that well also
has formation tops shown as sticks, Kingdom changes the formation tops to display
as disks with a diameter slightly larger than the diameter set for the perforations or
completions. This ensures any formation tops remain visible on the well.

Well Display Options - Properties tab

Wells > Well Display Options > Properties tab
Use the Properties tab of the Well Display Options dialog box to define the following items:
• Display color for completions and perforations
• Well label text color
• Thickness of the borehole display (measured in pixels)
• Diameter for completions and perforations
When defining the color for completion and perforation intervals, you can define unique
colors for individual perforations and completion intervals, apply the same color to all
perforation or completion intervals on a given well, or apply the same color for all perforation
or completion intervals on all wells.
To change the color of a specific perforation or completion on a well, select the well from the
list, click on the Color column for the perforation or completion you want to change, then
choose the color you want in the Color column and click OK.
To change the color for all the perforations or completions on a well, select the well from the
list, click All to select all the perforations and/or completions, and then select the color you
want from the completions and/or perforations Apply color list(s).
To change the color for a subset of perforations or completions on a well, press Ctrl and click
the perforations and/or completions you want to change, and then select the color you want
from the Apply Color list(s).

To change the thickness of a borehole, completion, or perforation, select the thickness you
want from the corresponding list and then click Apply. These changes apply to all wells.
Note: Unlike the diameter for completions and perforations, borehole thickness is measured
in pixels and it remains the same regardless of how much zoom you apply to the
VuPAK display. Completions and perforations do scale up or down in size based on
the amount of zoom applied.

Well Path Planner
Well Path Planner

VuPAK > Wells > Well Path Planner
With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Wells > Well Path Planner to open to the Well
Path Planner dialog box (see figure below). The Getting Started with Well Path Planner
window (Figure 5) also opens, describing how to digitize a well path.
In the Well Path Planner dialog box plan and view wellbore paths in VuPAK. Proposed well
paths can be created with this tool and existing proposed well paths can also be edited.
Edited proposed well paths can be saved to the well database.
Note: The functionality is intended primarily for geoscientists and is not intended to be a fully
functional wellbore planner that manages all aspects of drilling a directional well.
Engineering considerations are limited to five methodologies for converting the
planned well path to inclination and azimuth, setting an interpolation depth sample
interval and allowances for the maximum dog-leg severity.

Well Path Planner
Dialog box items include:

• Well menu—menu commands include:
- New—clear the fields on the Well Path Planner dialog box so you can create a new
well. You can also click the icon.
- Delete—select a well and click to delete the well. The well is removed from the
Digitized Well List.

Well Path Planner
Warning: The delete operation is irreversible.
- Save—select a well and click to save the well information. You can also click the
icon.
- First—click to display the information for the first well in the Digitized Well List.
- Previous—click to display the information to the well entered previously.
- Next—click to display the information for the next well in the Digitized Well List.
- Last—click to display the information for the last well in the Digitized Well List.
- List Well Data—select a well and click to go to the Well Summary dialog box to view
information about the well.
- Location—select a well and click to go to the Descriptive Location dialog box to
view information about the well.
• Borehole menu—menu commands include:
- New—clear the fields in the Borehole Data area so you can create a new borehole
for the selected well. You can also click the icon.
- Delete—select a well and a borehole, and click to delete the borehole.
Warning: The delete operation is irreversible.
- Time-Depth Charts—select a well and click to go to the Time-Depth Charts dialog

box for the selected well and borehole. You can also click the icon.
- Deviation Surveys—select a well and click to go to the Deviation Surveys dialog box
for the selected well. You can also click the icon.
• Proposed Well Name—enter a unique well name into this field to create a proposed well.
This field will also display the well name when a well is selected from the Digitized Well
List. This field is required.
• Proposed Well Number—enter the well number for the proposed well name. Multiple
wells may have the same name and are differentiated by well number. This field is
required.
• Proposed Elevation—enter the elevation reference of the proposed well in Z units. This
field is required.
• Elevation Reference—select one of the following references for elevation: DF (Derrick
Floor), GL (Ground Level) or KB (Kelly Bushing).
• Location Unit—select one of the following options to display the location of the well. The
selection determines what fields appear in Surface Location.
- X/Y—use the X and Y coordinate values in surface units.

Well Path Planner
- Inline/Crossline—use the inline and crossline values. A 3D seismic survey must be

enabled in the project tree for this field to be enabled. The 3D Survey field is
displayed below the Decimal Deg field.
- Decimal Deg—display the well’s latitude and longitude values in terms of decimal
degrees. The current Geodetic Datum is shown.
- Deg/Min/Sec—display the well’s latitude and longitude values in terms of degrees,
minutes, and seconds.
• Surface Location for X/Y—when you select X/Y, the following fields appear.
Figure 1 X/Y Surface Location Fields
- X—enter the X coordinate of the well’s surface. This is a required field.

- Y—enter the Y coordinate of the well’s surface. This is a required field.
- Surface Elevation—enter the height above sea level or ground level.
• Surface Location for Inline/Crossline—when you select Inline/Crossline, the following
fields appear.
Figure 2 Inline/Crossline Surface Location Fields
- Inline—enter the inline number of the well’s surface. This is a required field.

Well Path Planner
- Crossline—enter the crossline number of the well’s surface. This is a required field.
• Surface Location for Decimal Deg—when you select Decimal Deg, the following fields
appear.
Figure 3 Decimal Deg Surface Location Fields
- Latitude—enter the latitude coordinate of the well’s surface in degrees. This is a

required field.
- Longitude—enter the longitude coordinate of the well’s surface in degrees. This is a
required field.
• Surface Location for Deg/Min/Sec—when you select Deg/Min/Sec, the following fields
appear.
Figure 4 Deg/Min/Sec Surface Location Fields
- Latitude—enter the latitude coordinate of the well’s surface in degrees, minutes, and
seconds. This is a required field.

Well Path Planner
- Longitude—enter the longitude coordinate of the well’s surface in degrees minutes,

and seconds. This is a required field.
Note: If the input data for the Sec. field has a decimal point, the decimal will be
accepted. If the input data for Sec. field does not have a decimal point, and the
number of digits is greater than two, then a decimal point will be automatically
inserted for the Sec. field to be a real value. It will insert a decimal place two
digits from the left. For example, 0052 will become 0.52 seconds; 052 will
become 5.2 seconds; 5200 will become 52.0 seconds; 100 will become 10.0
seconds; and 10 will become 10.0 seconds. However, 0052.0 (entered with a
decimal point) will become 52.0 seconds. The current Geodetic Datum is
shown.
Note: After you enter the Surface Location information, the Digitize New Path
button becomes active.
• Borehole Data—enter the following information for the borehole:

- Borehole Name—enter a name for the borehole.
- Proposed UWI—enter a unique well identifier (UWI). Each borehole within a well is
given a UWI, which is used throughout Kingdom to identify the borehole. See
Guidelines on the Unique Well Identifier (UWI). This field is required.
- Kick-off Depth—enter the depth at which the borehole starts to deviate.
- Active Borehole Highlight Color—accept the color or click to open the Color dialog
box and select a new color. The Color dialog box changes the display color of the
highlighted borehole during the well path planner task only. The borehole color will not
change anywhere else. A single color, versus a color bar, applies to a fault surface or
a well.
- Digitize New Path—click to start digitizing the path that the borehole will take. For
more information, see Plan a New Wellbore Path.
- Edit Existing Path—click to edit an already digitized path. For more information, see
Edit an Existing Wellbore Path.
- Save As New Borehole—click to go to the New Borehole Name and UWI dialog
box to save the borehole.
• Borehole Comments—enter comments about the borehole. A maximum of 255
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
• Interpolation—complete the following fields to enter interpolation information:
- Depth Sample Interval—enter the sampling interval to be used in computing the
interpolated borehole. Curve fitting will be done only in depth and will be sampled
evenly according to the depth interval selected by the user
- Computation Method for Conversion to Inclination/Azimuth—select one of the
following options:

Well Path Planner
• Radius of Curvature—This algorithm is the industry standard. The drilled section is

treated as a curve inscribed on a cylindrical surface with a vertical axis. The vertical
and horizontal projections of this curve are assumed the arcs of circles whose radii
are calculated as functions of the build up rate and the rate of change of the azimuth.
• Minimum Curvature—The course is calculated between two points from tangent
vectors at the two points, which is similar to the Balanced Angle method, but this
method adds a correction factor. The correction factor treats the junction of the two
linear segments as an arc instead of a dogleg.
• Tangential—This method treats the curve as a line segment. X and Y values are
calculated from this straight-line segment. The azimuth (drift) and inclination
(deviation) of the data points are used to define the tangent at that point. Drawbacks
to this method are that the calculated depths are less than the true depths, and the
deflections of the curve are exaggerated.
• Average Angle—This method applies when the line segment between two points is
the same length as the drilled segment. The algorithm uses the average inclination
and azimuth of two points to define the segment.
• Balanced Angle—This method treats the drilled section as two separate linear
sections of equal length, which equal the total length of the curve. This algorithm
works well if the interval between the two measurements is long and the course has a
pronounced curve. The Balanced Angle method can produce results with greater
vertical depth and less deflection than in reality, especially in the case of build up, and
can have the opposite effect for drop off.
- Maximum Dog-leg Severity—enter the maximum angular rate of change in the
digitized borehole over the Degrees per Unit Interval specified below. The default is
10 degrees per 100 ft., or for metric units, 10 degrees per 30 m.
- Degrees per unit—enter the interval, in depth, over which deviation of the borehole
occurs by the Maximum Dog-log Severity parameter specified.
Note: The curve must be converted from x, y, and z coordinates to inclination and
azimuth. This must be done according to the selected method supported by
Kingdom (that is, radius of curvature, minimum curvature, etc.). If the angle
build along the well path is greater than the specified amount, a message
appears specifying the first and last points you have entered along the well
path where the angle build has exceeded the specification. You can change
the value in Maximum Dog-leg Severity or edit the existing well path by
clicking Edit Existing Path. Then click Interpolation to recalculate the curve
fit.
- Interpolation—click to calculate the curve fit.

- Save As New Borehole—click to go to the New Borehole Name and UWI dialog
box to save the borehole.
Figure 5 Getting Started with Well Path Planner window

Well Path Planner
Follow the directions in the Getting Started with Well Path Planner window to digitize a well
path. You can close the window without closing the Well Path Planner dialog box.
Plan a New Wellbore Path

To plan and view a new wellbore path in VuPAK, follow these steps.
1. With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Wells > Well Path Planner.
The Well Path Planner dialog box and Getting Started With Well Path Planner help
open.
You may close the Getting Started With Well Path Planner help at any time.
2. Complete the following fields on the Well Path Planner dialog box.
• Proposed Well Name
• Proposed Well Number
• Location Unit
• Borehole Data
• Surface Location

Well Path Planner
3. Click Digitize New Path to digitize the path of the well.

If you are in the time domain, the following message appears:
“There is no valid regional time-depth chart for this borehole.
Would you like to associate a shared T-D chart or create a new one at this time?”
4. Click Yes to close the message and open the Time-depth Chart dialog box.
5. Create a new time-depth chart or share an existing one for the proposed well path. The
Time-depth Chart dialog box is described in the Interpretation online Help.
6. Click OK after creating or sharing the time-depth chart.
The following message appears.
“Time Depth data has been changed. Do you want to apply these changes?”
7. Click Yes.
8. In Kickoff Depth on the Well Path Planner dialog box, enter the depth at which the
borehole will start to deviate.
9. Click Digitize New Path again.
The cursor in the VuPAK workspace changes to a D with a crosshair.
Tip: You may need to rotate the cube and zoom in to see it.
10. Click each point to digitize the proposed well path and then double-click to terminate
digitizing. Digitizing can be done on a horizon, grid, fault surface, or seismic display in
either the time or depth domain.
11. On the Well Path Planner dialog box, click Save as New Borehole to save the borehole.
The New Borehole Name and UWI dialog box opens.
Figure 6 New Borehole Name and UWI dialog box
12. Complete the fields. For more information, see New Borehole Name and UWI.
13. Click OK.

Well Path Planner
In the Well Path Planner dialog box, the borehole name with the suffix “_digitized”
appears in Borehole Name, the ID number appears in Unique Borehole ID, and any
comments entered appear in Borehole Comments.
In addition, the information is written to the database and the well appears on the VuPAK
Project Tree.
14. Complete the Interpolation fields. For more information, see Well Path Planner.
15. Click Interpolation to interpolate the digitized borehole with the selected algorithm using
the interval specified for Depth Sample Interval.
If your criteria are within engineering constraints, the results appear in VuPAK as shown
in the figure below.
Figure 7 Interpolated Borehole

Well Path Planner
If the criteria are not within engineering constraints, a message appears noting the points
where the path failed. For more information on editing the proposed borehole path, see
Editing an Existing Path.
16. After successful interpolation, click Save Interpolated Borehole to save the interpolated
curve as a new borehole in the database.
The New Borehole Name and UWI dialog box (Figure 6) appears.
17. Complete the fields. For more information, see New Borehole Name and UWI.
18. Click OK to save the data to the database.
Tip: After you interpolate and save the interpolated borehole, you have associated a
digitized well path and an interpolated well path for the same borehole with the well

Well Path Planner
path. You can differentiate the two by changing the borehole symbol and color of one
the paths. In VuPAK, double-click the bottom hole symbol. The Edit Well Data manager
appears. In the Borehole Data box you can change the Symbol and color.
Edit an Existing Wellbore Path

To edit an existing wellbore path in VuPAK, follow these steps.
1. With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Wells > Well Path Planner.
The Well Path Planner dialog box and Getting Started With Well Path Planner help
open.
You may close the Getting Started With Well Path Planner help at any time.
2. In Digitized Well List, select the well.
3. In Borehole Data, select the borehole.
4. Click Edit Existing Path.
In the VuPAK workspace, the line is highlighted and blue boxes appear at the digitized
points.
5. Change the digitized line as needed.
6. Double-click to end digitization.

Well Planner toolbar icons

The Well Planner Toolbar icons are located at the top of the Well Planner dialog box. Click the
icon to perform the following functions.
New Well Clear all the fields in the Well Path Planner dialog box
allowing for complete specification of a new well path.
New Borehole Clear only the Unique Borehole ID text field allowing for
the specification of a new borehole ID.
Save Well Store the well data in the database.
Time-depth Chart Open the Time-Depth dialog box to add, edit, assign,
and review time-depth data. This dialog box is described
in detail in the Kingdom Geophysics and Geology online
help.
Deviation Surveys Open the Deviation Survey dialog box to review and edit
existing deviation surveys and add new deviation
surveys. This dialog box is described in the Kingdom
Geophysics and Geology online help.

New Borehole Name and UWI
New Borehole Name and UWI

From the VuPAK menu select Wells > Well Path Planner > Save as New Borehole.
Changing the Borehole Name or Unique Borehole ID does not create a new borehole, but
rather just changes the name and UWI of the active one. Select the Save As New Borehole
button to activate a dialog box that allows specification of a new Borehole Name and Unique
Borehole ID. If a time-depth is not yet associated with this well, the user will be warned and
the Time-depth Charts dialog box will appear so the user can either create a time-depth
chart or share an existing one.
• New Borehole Name allows entry of a unique borehole name to associate with the
proposed well path digitized through the Well Path Planner. Wells usually have a primary
borehole named main and sidetracks with other names. The New Borehole Name
specified in this dialog will have _digitized appended to the name. Characters may be
typed in this field.
• New Unique Borehole ID or unique well identifier (UWI) displays the alphanumeric code
for either the main borehole or a sidetrack. Each borehole within a well is given a UWI,
which is used throughout Kingdom to identify the borehole. The UWI has two purposes.
First, the primary borehole displays the well symbol on base maps. In addition, the UWI is
used to identify the borehole for import operations. When borehole data are imported and
the name of the borehole is not specified, these data are assigned to the primary
borehole. See Guidelines on the Unique Well Identifier (UWI). Characters may be typed
in this field.
• Borehole Comments: allows up to 255 characters to be added as additional description
text for the borehole.

Logs Menu
Note: Wells must first be displayed before this menu is active.
The VuPAK Logs menu includes the following:
Log Curve Management Add and remove log types, rename logs, specify aliases for
logs, and copy and delete specific logs.
Select Wells to Display Add log curves to the well display. Assign log curves to the left
and right tracks of selected wells and set display settings.

VuPAK Log Settings
VuPAK Log Settings

Logs > Select Logs to Display
Note: Wells must first be displayed before this feature is active.
From the VuPAK menu, click Logs > Select Logs to Display to activate the Select Logs
dialog box. This dialog box may also be accessed by clicking on the Select Logs to Display
icon from the Seismic tool bar.
Assign log curves to the left and right tracks, set the color, thickness, and shading settings.
You can then save settings as a template.
Tabs include:
Scale and Style Setup Select log curves to display on wells in the VuPAK workspace.
Define the log curve display settings and save settings in a
template file.
Shading Apply constant or facies shading for the log curves. Crossover
shading is not available in VuPAK.

Defining log scale and style setup

Logs > Select Logs to Display > Scale & Style Setup
Note: Wells must first be displayed before this feature is active.
From the VuPAK menu, click Logs > Select Logs to Display to activate the Select Logs
dialog box. Click the Scale & Style Setup tab.
Tip: This dialog box may also be accessed by clicking the Select Logs to Display icon
from the Seismic tool bar.
The Scale and Style Setup tab defines which digital log curves to display for selected wells,
and their display settings. Once you have configured your settings, you can save them as a
template for later use.
All wells in the VuPAK workspace are listed under VuPAK Well List. Select a well to view the
available log curves for that well. If you select multiple wells, the list of logs is cumulative.
To define the log scale and style setup:

1. In the Select Wells dialog box, click the Scale and Style Setup tab if it is not active.
2. Select the well(s) that you want to display the logs for.
Note: If you have a log template, select the template in the list in the right pane. The logs
and settings in the template populate the dialog box. Click Apply to assign the
template settings to the selected well. If you do not want to use a template, continue
defining the log settings. See VuPAK log templates for template management options.
3. Select a log curve name and select the track that you want to display it in.
4. Click > to add the log name<>track number to Displayed Curves.
5. Highlight the log name/track number in the Displayed Curves field to view and set its
display parameters. Available parameters include the following:
Scale Displays the scale for the selected log curve<>track

number in Displayed Curves. You can manually enter
new values or accept the detected values.
Use Default For common log names, Kingdom assigns the Left and
Right values. See Scale ranges for known log curve
names. If the log name is not listed in the system default
scale table, you can create defaults in the cross section
Log Settings dialog box.
Logarithm Displays the selected log curve on the logarithmic scale.

Center in Track Displays the log centered in the track. This is useful
when a log curve’s scale varies from well to well.
Centering is accomplished by automatically changing the
scale for each well based on the value range of the
curve.
Display as Lathe Shows the log curve as a 3-dimensional shape. If you

have log curves in both tracks, do not use lathe display
for both as the log curve with the largest values will cover
the second log curve.
Lathe Thickness Controls the thickness of the lathe.
Line Color/Type/Thickness Settings for the line or lathe.
Width factor Enter a factor to multiply the width of the log curve by
that factor.
6. Repeat for the other log<>track assignment.

7. (Optional) Save the settings as a template to apply to other wells.
8. Click Apply to display the log curve(s) along the borehole in the VuPAK workspace.
VuPAK log templates

Log templates are saved log settings for viewing your log curves alongside the borehole. The
template file is an *.xml file. All log templates are author and project specific. Log settings for
wells persist for subsequent VuPAK sessions even if they are not saved as a template.
The icons below the list of VuPAK log templates are defined in the figure below. The log
template file is an .xml file. Log settings for wells persist for subsequent sections even if they
are not saved as a template.
1—Copy 4—Rename
2—Import 5—Delete
3—Export
Both Scale, Style Setup and Shading settings are saved in the VuPAK template.
Note: Log setting templates for cross sections cannot be imported into VuPAK. Likewise,
VuPAK log setting templates cannot be applied to a cross section.

Log shading
Log shading
Logs > Select Logs to Display > Shading tab
Note: This feature is available with an EarthPAK license and wells must first be displayed
before this feature is active.
From The VuPAK menu, click Logs > Select Logs to Display to activate the Select Logs
dialog box. Click the Shading tab.
The Shading tab determines the shading parameters for the displayed log curve.
• Constant shading highlights a log curve.
• Facies shading highlights one log curve, based on another log curve’s values.

• Log Curve displays the name of the log curve that will be shaded. The list is based on log
curves selected from the Scale and Style Setup tab.
• No Shading applies no shading to the log curve.
• Constant Shading applies shading to the selected log curve for all depth values.
- Color indicates the color for the log curve values.
• Facies Shading selects a facies log curve, in which values are used as a guide for
variable shading of the log curve selected in the Log Curve field (above).
• Facies Log Curve performs best when a log curve that indicates lithology is selected.
The range of values of this facies log curve will be assigned to a color bar, and the
selected log curve will be shaded accordingly.
- Color Bar button activates the Color Editor dialog box, which selects a color bar to
assign to the facies log curve.

Log shading
- Direction indicates whether the facies shading will be to the Left or Right of the
selected log curve line.
Note: Shading settings are saved in the log settings template file.

Log Scales
Log Scales
Logs > Log Scales
Note: Logs must first be displayed before this feature is active.
The Log Scales dialog box adjusts the amplitude scale of Track 1 (Left) and/or Track 2
(Right). The changes may be viewed immediately.

• Track 1 (Left) provides a slider bar to adjust the width of Track 1. The size number in the
field to the right of the slider bar provides the relative width size on a scale from 0.1 to 10,
varying logarithmically. The name of the log curve displayed in Track 1 is displayed to the
right of the size field.
• Track 2 (Right) provides a slider bar to adjust the width of Track 2. The size number in
the field to the right of the slider bar provides the relative width size on a scale from 0.1 to
10, varying logarithmically. The name of the log curve displayed in Track 2 is displayed to
the right of the size field.

Log Scales

Tops Menu
From the VuPAK menu, click Tops to display the menu items.
The Tops menu provides tools to manage, activate, and edit formation tops in the VuPAK
workspace. The Tops menu includes the following;
FormationTops Management Create, define aliases, display, edit the properties of,
copy, and delete formation tops within the project.
The Create, Alias, Copy, and Delete tabs are the same
as the tabs accessed from the main Kingdom menu
outside of VuPAK. However, the Display and Properties
tabs have options unique to VuPAK.
Set Active Surface for Picking Select a horizon, fault, formation top, control point set, or
fault cut to interpret.
Edit Formation Tops Add, edit, and remove formation tops for specific
boreholes in the Tops tab of Well Explorer.
See also Editing Formation Tops in the 3D Workspace
for tips on editing tops in VuPAK.
Interpolate Formation Tops Add formation tops to the active set of wells in VuPAK
based on the intersection of the input grid or horizon with
the borehole.

Setting formation top display properties
Setting formation top display properties

The Display tab, like the check boxes in Project Explorer, sets which formation tops are
active in the working set and provides positioning and style options for posting the formation
top information in the VuPAK workspace.
The settings on the Display tab are global for all of the author’s formation tops in the project
regardless of which tops are selected in the list on the left. Selecting a top in the list is the
same as selecting it (checking it on) in Project Explorer. Selected tops appear in the VuPAK
3D workspace.
Formation top display options include the following:
Annotation Display options include name, abbreviation, depth, time, and

author.
Depth values are posted as MD. You can change the depth type
on the Wells tab of the User Preferences dialog box: Project >
User Preferences.
Style Display the formation top marker as sticks or disks. Disks have
the additional display options of diameter size and transparency.
Edit Formation Tops Opens the Formation Tops tab in Well Explorer where you can
add, delete and edit formation tops for selected boreholes.
For more information about editing formation tops dynamically in
VuPAK, see Editing Formation Tops in the 3D Workspace.
Note: It is possible that formation tops set to display as disks will look distorted,
appearing as hexagons or squares. This is the result of a reduced number of
frames per second for the VuPAK rendering strategy. For more information, see
Rendering Strategy.

Assigning formation top properties

The Properties tab includes formation top color and symbol settings for each formation top.
The display properties for formation tops are authored. For example, if Author1 creates
formation top FT1 and assigns it to the color blue. Any time Author1 logs into the project, FT1
will appear blue. However, Author2 may like to see all other authors’ tops in yellow, so when
Author2 logs in to the project, Author2 can change FT1 to display in yellow. Therefore,
Author1 will see FT1 in blue, and Author2 will see FT1 in yellow.
You can edit single or multiple formation tops’ properties at the same time. When editing
multiple formation tops at the same time, the Name and Abbreviation fields are non-editable.
Formation top properties include the following:
Name/Rename Select a formation top from the list and click Rename to
change the name.
Abbreviation Create or change an abbreviation for the selected formation

top. This field is optional.
Text Attributes Include Font, Size in annotation units, and Style for the
formation top labels.

Edit Formation Tops Edit formation top data on the Formation Top tab in Well
Explorer.
For more information about editing formation tops in VuPAK,
see Editing Formation Tops in the 3D Workspace.
Related topics
Tops Menu

Editing Formation Tops in the 3D Workspace

Editing options for formation tops in VuPAK include adding, moving, and deleting well picks.
You cannot edit well picks that belong to an inactive author.
Well picks appear as either sticks or disks on the wellbore, depending on what options you
select on the Display tab of Formation Top Management.
You can edit formation tops numerically in the Tops tab in Well Explorer, or you can edit tops
on the borehole dynamically in the 3D workspace.
Tip: Double-clicking on the formation top opens the Tops tab in Well Explorer.
The following instructions are for editing existing tops in the 3D workspace. If the top does not
yet exist, you need to create it on the Create tab in Formation Top Management opened
from the Tops menu or from the Set Active Surface for Picking dialog box.
Set top active On the main menu select Tops > Set Active Surface for Picking and
for picking select the top.
or
Click once on the formation top on the borehole to set it active.
The status bar at the bottom of the VuPAK window shows the name and
color of the active formation top.
Add a top With the formation top set active for picking, click on the borehole depth
track or log curve where you want to add the new well pick.
If the well pick you are adding is for a formation top already picked on the
well, the new pick replaces the existing pick.
To add more than one well pick for the same formation top on the same
well, press Ctrl when adding a new well pick.
Press the Escape key to restore the original cursor and stop adding well
picks.

Move a top With the formation top set active for picking, click on the top and drag it to
the new position along the borehole. When selected, formation tops
always appear as disks.
Delete a top Right-click the formation top and select Delete.

Or
With the top selected and active for moving, press the Delete key. When
the top is active, it is larger and outlined in red.
Note: If you have aliased another author’s top to one of your own, editing the other author’s
top automatically creates that top under your author. The other author’s top is not
edited.
Kingdom supports multiple undo and redo for formation tops:

• Undo—from the Tops menu or (Ctrl+Z).
• Redo—from the Tops menu or (Ctrl+Y).

Faults Menu
From the VuPAK menu, click Faults to display the menu items.
The Faults menu provides tools to manage fault surfaces and fault cuts, and to activate fault
surfaces in the VuPAK workspace. The ability to control the fault surface type is also
available.
right click the displayed object and select View <object> in VuPAK. VuPAK will launch
with the selected object displayed in the workspace.
Menu items include:
Fault Surface Management Create, display, edit the properties of, copy, and delete fault
surfaces within the project. The fault surfaces appear as
planes through the VuPAK workspace.
Fault Cut Management Create, display, edit the properties of, copy, and delete fault
cuts within the project. All tabs are the same as the tabs
accessed from the main Kingdom menu outside of VuPAK
except for the Display tab which has options unique to
VuPAK.
Set Active Surface for Designate which specific horizon, formation top, fault, fault
Picking cut or control point set to interpret. The management
dialogs are also available through the Create, Display,
Delete button.
Edit Fault Cuts Add fault cuts to specific boreholes in the Fault Cuts dialog
box. Fault cuts may also be edited and removed from
specific boreholes.
You can also pick and edit fault cuts interactively on the
wellbore. See Picking and editing fault cuts.
Smooth Fault Surfaces Smooth single or multiple fault surfaces using the flex grid
algorithm. (Not available with the pre 8.6 fault system)
Decimate Faults If a fault has a very large number of picks, decimating - or

removing - picks from your fault will improve performance.
(Not available with the pre 8.6 fault system)
Clip Fault Remove fault surfaces the penetrate other fault surfaces for
improved geological interpretation. (Not available with the
pre 8.6 fault system).
Surface Type Set the display type as Point, Line, Mesh, or Filled for the
selected horizon, fault, or grid.

Change Transparency of All Set the level of transparency of the fault data
Faults

Surface Type
Surface Type
The Surface Type dialog box sets the display type as Point, Line, Mesh, or Filled for the
From the VuPAK menu click Horizons > Surface Type, Faults > Surface Type or Grids >
Surface Type to activate the Surface Type dialog box. Depending on the item selected, one
of the dialog boxes shown in the figures below appears.
Tip: This feature can also be accessed by clicking on a displayed horizon, fault, or grid with
the right mouse button. Select Surface Type from the right mouse button menu.
Following options are available:

• Horizons—displays a list of all available horizons in the current working set.
• Faults—displays a list of all available faults in the current working set.
• Grids—displays a list of all available grids in the current working set.
• Surface Type—allows selection of one of the following types. This controls how the
surface will appear in the VuPAK workspace.
- Point—display the surface as a set of 3D points.
- Mesh—display the surface as a set of triangles forming a meshed grid.

Surface Type
- Filled—display the surface as a set of triangles and fills the triangles with color.
- Segments—(available on the Faults tab) display fault segments only.
An active surface’s display type cannot be changed. If a change is attempted on an active
surface, a warning message “Error: Can not change display on an active surface” appears.
Click OK to return to the Surface Type dialog box and apply the change only to surfaces that
are not active.
To apply a change to an active surface, first close the Surface Type dialog box by clicking on
Cancel. Then click Horizons, Faults, or Grids > Set Active Surface and click No Active
Horizon (or Fault or Grid) to deactivate the active surface. The surface type can then be
changed.

Change Transparency of All Faults
Change Transparency of All Faults

Faults > Change Transparency of All Faults
Select Faults > Change Transparency of All Faults to display a dialog box with a slider bar
to adjust the level of transparency for the selected fault or on all faults simultaneously. You
can adjust the level of visibility for faults displayed in the VuPAK workspace from completely
transparent to completely opaque.

Fault Cut Management - Display

In the Display tab select which fault cuts to display, specify what annotations to display on
fault cuts, and select the marker style.
1. Select the fault cuts to which you want to assign display settings.
To narrow a long list of objects, enter a string in the search field. The first name beginning
with the entered string will be highlighted. Click Filter to display only those names
beginning with the search string. Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple contiguous
or non-contiguous objects.
2. Select the display settings for selected fault cuts. Display settings include:
Display Working Set Display all fault cuts selected as the working set in base map
and vertical windows. If unchecked, fault cut information will
not be displayed in interpretation windows.
Annotation Select the information to display as labels to the left of the

borehole in the vertical display windows. Annotations include
Name, Abbreviation, Depth, Time, and Throw.
Style Specify how you want the fault cut displayed on the borehole.
The shape can be a wavy stick or a disc. Other options
include size and opacity.

Edit Fault Cuts Edit the fault cut data in a spreadsheet in the Edit Fault Cuts
dialog box. See also Picking and editing fault cuts for tips on
interactively editing in VuPAK.
Related topics
Faults Menu
Picking and editing fault cuts


Picking and editing fault cuts interactively in VuPAK includes adding, moving, and deleting
well picks. You cannot edit picks that belong to another author.
Fault cuts appear as wavy sticks or disks on the wellbore, depending on what options you
select on the Fault Cut Display tab.
A fault cut is often determined by correlating log curves from one well with other logs from
surrounding wells, or by the intersection of interpreted fault segments and surfaces with the
wellbore.
3. Create the fault cut in Fault Cut Management: Faults > Fault Cut Management.
4. Set the fault cut active for picking: Faults > Set Active Surface for Picking. On the cross
section the cursor changes to digitize mode, a crosshair [+] with a D in the upper right
quadrant.
5. Pick the fault cut on the borehole(s) by clicking at the point in the depth track. If a pick for
that fault cut already exists on the borehole, the fault cut will move to the new location.
To move existing picks, you can also click on the fault cut and drag to the new position on
the borehole. The selected fault cut becomes the active surface for picking. The name,
color, and position of the fault cut are displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the
VuPAK workspace. After moving, double-click to set the position.
6. To enter vertical separation (throw), double-click on the fault cut marker to open the Edit
Fault Cuts dialog box.
7. Press the Escape key to restore the original cursor and stop adding well picks.
To delete a fault cut pick, click on the fault cut marker and press the Delete key.
Note: If the fault cut data is selected to be included in the fault surface, the displayed
surface dynamically updates as you add, move, or delete fault cut picks.
Related topics
Fault Surface Management
Geology in 3D

Horizons Menu
Overview
From the VuPAK menu, click Horizons to display the menu items.
Note: You can also access the horizon menu by right clicking on a displayed horizon.
The Horizons menu provides tools to manage, activate, set picking parameters for, and
display attributes for horizons in the VuPAK workspace. The ability to control the horizon
surface type and rendering strategy is also available.
See also Picking Horizons in VuPAK.
right click on the displayed object and select View <object> in VuPAK. VuPAK will
Menu items include:
Horizon Management Create, edit the properties of, display, copies, and delete
horizons within the project. The horizons appear as planes
through the VuPAK workspace.
Set Active Surface for Select which specific horizon, formation top, or fault to
Picking interpret. The management dialogs are also available through
the Create, Display, Delete button.
Picking Parameters Determine the interpretation strategy for the active horizon:
• General Picking Parameters
• Picking Parameters for SurfaceHunt
• Picking Parameters for Volume
• Autopicking with the Flex Picker in VuPAK
Display Attributes Determine display parameters for one or more horizons.

Select a horizon, data type, sampling increment, and vertical
display factor.
Display Attributes Determine display parameters for one or more horizons.

Select a horizon, data type, sampling increment, and vertical
display factor.
Surface Type Set the display type as Point, Mesh, or Filled for the selected
horizon, fault, or grid.

Render Settings Control parameters for horizon and grid display that affect
rendering speed and resolution. These surfaces are rendered
in the VuPAK workspace by constructing triangles to
represent the surface. The surface is displayed in the Fill
mode by drawing these triangles and filling them with the
proper colors. The more triangles there are, the longer it takes
to display the view. However, the faster the view can be
rendered, the smoother the image movement will appear.
Change Transparency of Change the transparency of the selected horizons or all

All Horizons horizons in the VuPAK workspace.

Picking Horizons in VuPAK
Picking Horizons in VuPAK

With the exception of polygon autopicking, the standard picking modes available in 2d/3dPAK
are also available in VuPAK. See Picking Horizons Overview.
Tip: Control the limit of your 3D autopicker by a defined scope.
Kingdom’s Advanced Horizon Autopicker is available with a Kingdom Advanced license.

In addition to the standard picking modes, VuPAK has two methods of volume-based horizon
interpretation:
Surface Hunt Requires the user to have a 3D survey volume loaded in one of the five
Animation modes.
Volume Hunt Requires the user to have a 3D survey loaded in the Volume Rendering
Animation mode.
Flex Picker Provides a way to pick a horizon that is not snapped to a particular event.
Kingdom supports multiple undo and redo for horizon picks, regardless of the method used to
pick a horizon. Undo and redo are both available from the VuPAK horizon menu, from the
Horizons Picking tool bar, from the horizon context menu, and from the keyboard (Ctrl+Z,
Ctrl+Y). If you change the active surface for picking or close VuPAK, the undo/redo history is
lost. See also Erase Horizons in VuPAK.

Horizon Picking with Surface Hunt

VuPAK allows interpretation of horizons when in animation mode using a method called
SurfaceHunt. This method is a 3D, geometrically spreading surface picking algorithm. It
recognizes fault boundaries and can be guided by the Scope box in VuPAK.
To pick a horizon in animation mode using SurfaceHunt:

1. With the VuPAK workspace active, choose Surveys > Displaying seismic object(s) to
load the animation volume.
2. Select any one of the animation display modes other than Volume Rendering
Animation and make sure that Disable interaction with this volume (view only) is
unchecked and click OK.
3. Set the active horizon for picking: Horizons > Set Active Surface for Picking. You can
also create a new horizon or display an existing horizon through this selection if
necessary.
Note: If an existing horizon is selected in VuPAK, the interpretation is overwritten. It is

recommended to either create a new horizon for the VuPAK interpretation or make
a copy through Horizons > Horizon Management > Copy tab.
4. Right-click in the volume and choose Picking Parameters. See Picking Parameters for
SurfaceHunt.
5. Select SurfaceHunt, then set the desired picking parameters. These are the same
parameters that are used in the Autopick—2D Hunt method in 2d/3dPAK and VuPAK.
The pick mode and pick phase can also be controlled from the Horizon Menu.
6. Click OK to close.
The cursor changes to a crosshair with a 3 in the upper left quadrant and an H in the
lower right quadrant.
Note: You can also press 3 to activate SurfaceHunt picking mode.
7. If using the Scope, move it to the desired location. Adjust the animation display within the
Scope box so that one or more seed points can be picked. If the seed point is to be on
the outside of the Scope, the surface must be an active one (it must be movable). Click
each seed point to be included. Double-click to start the surface hunt. The picking will
proceed laterally within the Scope. It is not an inline/crossline search; it is a geometric
search away from the seed point. Existing picks will be overwritten.
8. After the picking has concluded, the horizon will display in the VuPAK workspace,
controlled by the selected or default color bar. The horizon may be edited by any normal
Kingdom Geophysics horizon editing method or tool.
9. SurfaceHunt – Continue is the same as SurfaceHunt except it uses all existing picks
(manual and non-manual) within the SuperScope boundaries as seed points. It is
activated using the SHIFT+3 keys on the keyboard or by pointing to the seismic volume
and with the right mouse button selecting Horizon: Pick Mode > SurfaceHunt –
Continue.

Picking Parameters for SurfaceHunt

Horizons > Picking Parameters
See Horizon Picking with Surface Hunt for previous steps in the autopicking process.
Select SurfaceHunt horizon picking type in the Picking Parameter dialog box to pick a
horizon on a seismic volume loaded in one of the animation modes.
See Horizon Picking Parameters for a description of each parameter.

Horizon Picking with Volume Hunt

VuPAK allows interpretation of horizons using a method called Volume. This method is
available in the VuPAK workspace when in the Volume Rendering mode.
Volume uses user-defined opacity settings to pick specific voxels. Picking seed points on a
visible object will create three horizons: an upper, lower, and maximum/minimum surface.
The upper and lower surfaces are determined by where the object becomes visible. The
maximum/minimum surface is the peak or trough (depending on the opacity settings) of the
trace values located between the upper and lower surfaces. Volume recognizes fault
boundaries.
Note: Kingdom’s Advanced Horizon Autopicker is available with a Kingdom Advanced

license.
To pick a horizon in Volume Rendering mode using Volume, follow these steps.
1. Load the volume in the VuPAK workspace as follows:
• From the VuPAK menu, choose Surveys > Displaying seismic object(s).
• Select the surveys, the data types, SuperScope dimensions, and Volume Rendering
Animation Mode to load the rendering volume.
• Make sure that Disable interaction with this volume (view only) is unchecked.
• Click OK to load the volume.
2. Select an existing horizon or create the horizon to be used for interpretation.
Note: If you select an existing horizon, the interpretation will be overwritten. It is

recommended that you either create a new horizon for the VuPAK interpretation
or make a copy of the horizon using Horizons > Horizon Management > Copy.
3. From the VuPAK menu, select Surveys > Opacity and Color Bar. Use the opacity curve
to limit the displayed voxels. Only displayed voxels will be available for picking.
Note: The opacity curve must be set so that only negative trace attribute values or only
positive trace attribute values are visible before horizons will be picked using
Volume.
4. Activate the Volume picking mode by using one of the following methods:
• Press the V key on the keyboard to activate Volume picking mode.
• Choose View > Toolbars, then:
- Click Horizons Picking. The Horizons Picking tool bar appears.

- Click to start the Volume.
The cursor changes to a crosshair with a V in the lower right quadrant , and,
simultaneously, the Using VuPAK Volume Hunt information window opens (see
figure immediately below). The Using VuPAK Volume Hunt window displays
information for a Volume Hunt workflow.
Figure 1 Using VuPAK VolumeHunt Window Help
5. Follow the steps in the Using VuPAK Volume Hunt information window to adjust the
SuperScope.
The Scope can be used to isolate an area of interest, planting the seed picks and
beginning the VolumeHunt and then moved within the volume for continued autopicking
of the horizon.
• If using the Scope, move it to the desired location.

• Adjust the rendering display within the Scope box so the seed voxel(s) can be picked.
If any seed voxels are to be on the outside of the Scope, the surface must be an
active one (it must be movable).
• The Scope can be activated from the Surveys Menu or from the volume right
mouse button menu. For detailed information on using the scope, refer to the
discussion on SuperScope subvolumes.
6. Click the first seed point to begin digitizing, then click each seed point to be included.
Note: During seed picking, you can hold Shift down and click the arrow icon to move the
face.
press Esc to delete the last pick.
7. Double-click the last seed point to start VolumeHunting.

The VolumeHunting status window appears, showing the time remaining for the
VolumeHunt.
The voxel picking will proceed within the Scope as it is moved within the volume. The
voxel picking uses either a 6 or 26 connectivity search, specified in the Picking
Parameters dialog box in the Horizon menu. This means that once the seed voxel is
selected, picking will occur in either 6 or 26 voxel directions: If 6 directions is specified,
the adjacent voxels on all 6 sides of the seed points are examined. If 26 directions is
specified, all voxels with adjacent sides, corners, and diagonals to the seed points are
examined. Existing picks will be overwritten.
VolumeHunt simultaneously picks three surfaces:
• The Active Horizon with _Up appended to the name
This surface characterizes the attribute data at the upper dimensional limit of the
VolumeHunt. The attribute values associated with this horizon will be positive or
negative in value, and will carry the range of voxels derived from data as defined by
the opacity curve at zero visibility, voxels at a value of 90 percent or greater
transparency.
• The Active Horizon with __Down appended to the name
This surface characterizes the attribute data at the lower dimensional limit of the
trace. The attribute values associated with this horizon will be positive or negative in
value, and will carry the range of voxels derived from the data as defined by the
opacity curve at zero visibility, voxels at a value of 90 percent transparency or greater.
• The Active Horizon
The third component of the VolumeHunt characterizes the primary surface of the
trace data constrained by the dimensional limits of the previous _Up and _Down
surfaces based on the opacity curve. The attribute values associated with this
“primary” horizon are determined by finding the maximum or minimum value (Peak or
Trough) of the visible trace data within the interval.
After the picking has concluded, all three surfaces display in the VuPAK workspace,
controlled by selected or default color bar. Two new surfaces, <horizon name>_up and

<horizon name>_down, will appear in the VuPAK Project Tree. The horizons may be
edited by any normal Kingdom Geophysics horizon editing method or tool.
Picking Parameters for Volume

See Horizon Picking with Volume Hunt for previous steps in the autopicking process.
Select Volume horizon picking type in the Picking Parameter dialog box to pick a horizon on
a seismic volume loaded in Volume Rendering Animation Mode.
• Volume Hunt options—select either 6 or 26 for the voxel picking. This means that once
the seed voxel is selected, picking will occur in either 6 or 26 voxel directions. If 6
directions is specified, the adjacent voxels on all 6 sides of the seed points are examined.
If 26 directions is specified, all voxels with adjacent sides, corners, and diagonals to the
seed points are examined. Existing picks will be overwritten.
• See Horizon Picking Parameters for a description of other parameters.

Autopicking with the Flex Picker in VuPAK

The Flex Picker provides a way to pick a horizon that is not snapped to a particular event.
This picker is useful when picking on poor quality seismic data. See also Flex Gridding
Algorithm.
The Flex Picker calculates a grid surface from your initial manual picks using the specified
Flex grid parameters. It then creates a horizon from the flex grid values.
1. In the Picking Parameters dialog box, select Flex Picker as the picking type.
Picking parameters for the Flex Picker are as follows:

• Flex Grid Parameters—include fit type and smoothness. Move the slider for each or enter
a numeric value in the box above the slider and view the result in the example window.
• Other (Flex Picker) Options—options exclusive to the Flex Picker include preserving non-
flex picked 3D autopicks, and extracting the amplitude attribute while picking.

• Fit options—options include Use linear fit and Use spline fit
• Start options—are available with Flex Picker and the 3D advanced horizon autopickers
(3D Seeker, and 3D Seeker+).
• Spatial limit—are the same for all autopickers.
• Extrapolation limit—see Secondary Grid Options.
Other (Flex Picker) Options

The Flex Picker has 4 other options. When autopicking with the Flex Picker in VuPAK, there
is a fifth option. See Picking Horizons in VuPAK.
VuPAK only.
Apply a Bandpass Filter and Update map and vertical display options are available with
the other autopickers. See Other options in VuPAK in the general Horizon Picking
Parameters.
Other options for the Flex Picker are as follows:
• Preserve all autopicks—if the selected horizon has picks from one of the autopickers,
these picks will be preserved. If this option is not checked, the picks determined by the
Flex Picker will replace any existing picks.
• Extract amplitude attribute while picking—if checked will extract the amplitude
attribute from the seismic data and add it as a horizon attribute.

Erase Horizons in VuPAK
Erase Horizons in VuPAK

Use the Erase picking type to remove already picked horizons on a vertical slice. Erasing can
occur on any event. This erase option is available from a VSD or in VuPAK.
You can select Erase mode through the Keyboard Shortcut: E = (E)rase mode or by selecting
Erase Picking Mode in the Picking Parameters dialog box.
Keyboard Shortcut: E = (E)rase mode

- With the horizon displayed, click E once to activate Erase Mode. The cursor will have
a P for Point or W for Whole line depending on the last choice.
- Click E again to switch between Point <>Line erase.
- Then click on the horizon to erase your selected point or line.
Erase Picking Mode

1. Right click on the vertical display or cube with the horizon picks that you want to erase
and select Picking Parameters. (Keyboard shortcut = Q)
2. Under Picking type select Erase.
• Available options—You can erase individual picks or a whole line. Make your selection
and click OK to return to the vertical display.
• On the vertical display, click on the points (or line) you want to erase.
Keyboard Shortcut: E = (E)rase mode: Click E again to switch between Point <>Line
erase.

Display Horizon Attributes

From the VuPAK menu, click Horizons > Display Attributes to activate the Display
Attributes (Horizon) dialog box.
The Display Attributes dialog box determines display parameters for one or more horizons.
Select a horizon, data type, sampling increment, and vertical display factor. The option also
exists to apply these parameters to all VuPAK horizons.
Tip: This feature can also be accessed by clicking a displayed horizon with the right mouse
button. Select Display Attributes from the right mouse button menu.

• Horizon displays a list of available horizons within the current working set. Use the down
arrow to select a horizon.
• Data Type lists the corresponding data types for the selected horizon. Select a data type
to display in the VuPAK workspace. The color bar will reflect the data type values.
• Sampling Increment in Bins decimates the data to increase display speed. For
example, a value of 2 displays every other sample in both the inline and crossline
directions, thus reducing the number of points by a factor of 4. Resolution will be
diminished as fewer points are selected for display.
• Vertical Scale Factor sets a vertical scaling factor. For example, a value of 2 doubles the
vertical extent of the horizon. The horizontal scales remain unchanged. Use the up and
down arrow keys to adjust the sampling increment.

Tip: The Vertical Scale Factor is very useful to exaggerate subtle dip. Features that are
hardly visible at a normal scale will become very distinct with a high (5-10) scale factor.
Be aware that the vertical scale on the project cube annotation is no longer valid for any
horizon that has a scale factor greater than 1.
• Apply to All, when checked, applies the parameters to all of the displayed horizons in the
VuPAK workspace. When unchecked, the parameters apply only to the selected horizon.

Horizon and Grid Display Resolution Settings
Horizon and Grid Display Resolution Settings

Horizons > Render Settings
Use the Horizon and Grid Display Resolution Settings dialog box to select the resolution
settings for the VuPAK display.
From the VuPAK menu, click Horizons > Render Settings or Grids > Render Settings to
open the Horizon and Grid Display Resolution Settings dialog box.

• Display resolution—use the slider bar to set the display resolution.
• Resolution when moving—select one of the following options:
- Low—use a low resolution when moving the cube.
- Same as display resolution—use the same setting as selected in Display
resolution.

Rendering Strategy
Rendering Strategy
Right-click in the VuPAK workspace and select Rendering Strategy to open the Rendering
Strategy dialog box.
The Rendering Strategy dialog box controls parameters for horizon and grid display that
affect rendering speed and resolution.
These surfaces are rendered in the VuPAK screen by building triangles to represent the
surface. The surface is displayed in the Fill mode by drawing these triangles and filling them
with the proper colors.
The more triangles there are, the longer it takes to display the view. However, the faster the
view can be rendered, the smoother the image movement will appear.

• Strategy for Horizons and Grids displays the four available rendering options. The
VuPAK display will be updated dynamically.
- Normal displays the horizon or grid with full resolution. No data points are skipped
when rendering the object.
- Fixed Number of Triangles specifies the number of triangles to be used to render
the object. If the speed of rendering is too slow, the number of triangles can be
decreased to speed up rendering and provide smooth movement. This option is not
currently implemented.
- Frames Per Second specifies the frequency of rendering new frames. Objects in the
window will appear to move smoothly if rendered at a rate of at least 15 frames per
second. Although this option is specified in frames per second, the actual speed is
dependent on the computer speed, the graphics card, the number of objects being
rendered, and the way the objects are rendered. Instead of the absolute speed, this
parameter is the relative rendering speed, slower to faster.

Rendering Strategy
- Fixed Percentage specifies the percentage of the normal number of triangles to be

used to render horizons and grids. For faster but coarser displays, select a smaller
percentage.
• Full Rendering When Still, displays the horizon or grid at full resolution when the display
is not moving. When unchecked, Kingdom uses the parameters selected in the four
rendering options above to render the object when the display is not moving.
Note: Selecting the Full Rendering When Still option may affect performance. If you
notice performance problems with VuPAK, clear this selection and select the
Frames Per Second option as the rendering strategy. Selecting a lower frame
rate may cause formation tops displayed as disks to look distorted, appearing as
hexagons or squares rather than disks.

Rendering Strategy

Grids Menu
From the VuPAK menu, click Grids to display the Grids menu.
The Grids menu provides tools to manage and display attributes for grids in the VuPAK
workspace. The ability to control the grid surface type and rendering strategy is also
available.
right click on the displayed object and select View <object> in VuPAK. VuPAK will
The Grids menu contains the following. See also Related topics below the table:
Grid Management Edit the properties of, displays, copies, and deletes grids
within the project. The grids appear as planes through the
VuPAK workspace.
Create Grid Create a grid from a combination of horizons, formation tops,

contours, fault surfaces, fault cuts, other grids, XYZ points,
zones, or well information.
Display Attributes Determine display parameters for one or more grids. Select a
grid, data type, sampling increment, and vertical display factor.
The option also exists to apply these parameters to all VuPAK
grids.
Render Settings Control parameters for horizon and grid display that affect
rendering speed and resolution. These surfaces are rendered
in the VuPAK workspace by constructing triangles to represent
the surface. The surface is displayed in the Fill mode by
drawing these triangles and filling them with the proper colors.
The more triangles there are, the longer it takes to display the
view. However, the faster the view can be rendered, the
smoother the image movement will appear.
Change Transparency Change the transparency of the selected grid or all grids in the
of All Grids VuPAK workspace.
Control Point Opens the Control Point Set Management dialog box, which
Management provides access to the control point management features
common to both VuPAK and Kingdom Geophysics and
Geology. For information about control point management
features that are unique to VuPAK, see Managing control
points in VuPAK.

Set Active Surface for Specify the horizon, formation, top, fault, picked interval, or
Picking control point set you want to interpret.
Delete Control Points Delete control points from within the VuPAK workspace. You
can select individual control points to delete or lasso multiple
control points to delete.
Control Point Import Import a control point set from a text file.
Related topics
Draping maps on surfaces

Displaying grid attributes

Grids > Display Attributes
From the VuPAK menu, click Grids > Display Attributes to activate the Display Attributes
(Grid) dialog box.
The Display Attributes dialog box determines display parameters for one or more grids.
Select a grid, data type, sampling increment, and vertical display factor. The option also
exists to apply these parameters to all VuPAK grids.
Tip: This feature can also be accessed by clicking on a displayed grid with the right mouse
button. Select Display Attributes from the right mouse button menu.

• Grids displays a list of available grids within the current working set. Use the down arrow
to select a grid.
• Data Type lists the corresponding data types for the selected grid. Select a data type to
display in the VuPAK workspace. The color bar will reflect the data type values.
• Sampling Increment in Bins decimates the data to increase display speed. For
example, a value of 2 displays every other sample in both the X and Y directions, thus
reducing the number of points by a factor of 4. Resolution will be diminished as fewer
points are selected for display.
• Vertical Scale Factor sets a vertical scaling factor. For example, a value of 2 doubles the
vertical extent of the grid. The horizontal scales remain unchanged. Use the up and down
arrow keys to adjust the sampling increment.

Tip: The Vertical Scale Factor is very useful to exaggerate subtle dip. Features that are
hardly visible at a normal scale will become very distinct with a high (5-10) scale factor.
Be aware that the vertical scale on the project cube annotation is no longer valid for any
grid that has a scale factor greater than 1.
• Apply to All, when checked, applies the parameters to all of the displayed grids in the
VuPAK workspace. When unchecked, the parameters apply only to the selected grid.


The option to drape a grid on a primary grid or horizon is available from the right-mouse
button menu on the displayed surface in VuPAK: Right-click > Drape Grid. This option is
useful if you want to drape an attribute map (for example, thickness, net-to-gross, porosity)
onto a structure grid or horizon.
The Select Grid for Draping dialog box lists all grids in the project for all active authors.
To select a grid for draping:

1. Right-click on the displayed grid or horizon in time or depth and select Drape Grid.
2. Select the grid that you want to drape on the displayed surface.
The secondary grid can be in any domain. The XY values of the secondary grid are
mapped to the primary surface, but the Z units are taken from the primary surface.
3. If the secondary grid has “holes” or does not extend to the limits of the primary surface,
you can select Make null values transparent. If unchecked, the areas where there are
null values in the secondary grid will be filled with the color of the primary surface
underneath.
4. Click OK to drape the grid and exit the dialog box, or Apply to keep the dialog box open.

Changing transparency of all grids
Changing transparency of all grids

Grids > Change Transparency of All Grids
Select Grids > Change Transparency of All Grids to display a dialog box with a slider bar
to adjust the level of transparency for the selected grid or for all grids simultaneously. You can
adjust the level of visibility for grids displayed in the VuPAK workspace from completely
transparent to completely opaque.

Managing control points in VuPAK

This section explains the control point management features that are unique to VuPAK. For
more information about control point management features that are common between VuPAK
and Kingdom Geophysics and Geology, see Control Point Management.
Related topics
Moving control points
Deleting control points
Picking control points

To pick control points in the VuPAK workspace, you must first select a control point set as the
active surface for picking. Once you have a control point selected, press D on the keyboard
to begin digitizing control points. You can digitize control points on wells, cross sections,
seismic sections, and 3D seismic data (including volume rendering mode). Press Esc to stop
digitizing.
Moving control points

You can move individual control points in the VuPAK workspace. To move a control point,
right-click on the control point, select Edit from the menu, and then select whether to move
the control point along a specific X, Y, or Z axis or along all three axes using the Free Space
option. If you choose to move a control point along a specific axis, a bi-directional arrow
appears in the VuPAK workspace indicating the direction of the axis. Click and drag the
control point along the axis in either direction. If you chose the Free Space option, the cursor
changes to . Click and drag the control point to any location within the VuPAK workspace.
Deleting control points

There are several ways to delete control points in VuPAK. To delete a single control point,
click on the control point you want to delete, and then press Delete.
To delete several control points at once, hold the Shift key, click on the control points you
want to delete, and then press Delete.
You can also lasso a set of control points and delete everything inside the lasso.
To delete control points by lasso:
1. from the Grids menu select Delete Control Points By Lasso or click on the
Geologic Modeling tool bar.
2. In the Selecting control points to delete dialog box, select the set(s) from which you want
to delete control points or click All to delete control points from any set.
Note: This dialog box only displays if no control point set is already selected as the
active surface for picking.

3. Click OK. The cursor changes to .

4. Click and drag the cursor to draw a lasso around the control points you want to delete.
When you release the right mouse button any control points within the boundaries you
drew are deleted.
You do not need to completely close a lasso shape to delete the control points inside its
boundaries. Kingdom deletes any control points that are at bounded by at least 180 .
You can undo and redo the deletion of control points. From the Grids menu, select Undo/
Redo and then select whether to undo or redo a single deletion or all deletions. You can also
press Ctrl + Z to undo a deletion and Ctrl + Y to redo a deletion.

Selecting control points to delete

Grids > Delete Control Points By Lasso
Select one or more control point sets that you want to delete clusters of points from using the
lasso tool. Selecting all available control point sets allows you to delete control points from
any available control point set. If you do not select at least one control point set you will not
be able to delete any control points. You can also click on the Geologic Modeling tool bar.
For more information about deleting control points, see Deleting control points.
You can undo and redo the deletion of control points. From the Grids menu, select Undo/
Redo and then select whether to undo or redo a single deletion or all deletions.


Contours Menu
Introduction
From the VuPAK menu, click Contours to display the menu items.
The Contours menu provides tools to manage contours in the VuPAK workspace.
Menu items include:
• Contour Management—create, import, edit the properties of, copy, and delete contours
within the project. Display in VuPAK is also available.
Tip: You can display contours on horizons, grids, and faults from the right-mouse button
(RMB) menu. Right-click on the surface and select Generate 7.5 Contours. To remove
the contours, right-click and select Unload Contours.

Tools Menu
From the VuPAK window choose Tools to display the following items.
• Video Capture in VuPAK—continuously and automatically capture VuPAK images into
Windows movie (*.avi) files, create a new display, open an existing *.avi file, and save a
new *.avi file. The animation properties can also be set, items captured, and saved file
contents played back.
• Animation—view volumes of seismic data using slice (inline, crossline, or time/depth),
chair-cut, volume, oblique cut, and oblique plane animations. The scanning bar may also
be controlled.
• Stereo Mode With 3D Cursor—opens the Stereo Preferences dialog box to specify to
Use Stereo and then select a type of stereo view from a drop down list. You can also
adjust the stereo to Reverse left and right views, and use slider bars to adjust the Zero
parallax balance and the Camera offset.
• Crossplot—specify a new crossplot, open an existing crossplot file, or change the size of
the symbols in an displayed crossplot.
• Headlight Editor—opens the Headlight Editor. The headlight positions the light at lower
angles to view subtle features such as small faults and fracture patterns.

Video Capture in VuPAK

From the VuPAK menu, choose Tools > Video Capture to display the menu items that allow
you to continuously and automatically VuPAK images into *.avi (Microsoft Video for Windows)
files, create a new display; open an existing *.avi file, save a file, and set the animation
properties, capture items, and play back saved file contents.
Menu items include:
• Play—play a recorded animation.
• Record—start recording the animation. A check () appears indicating this method is in
current use. VuPAK enters an automatic continuous recording mode where every
manipulation to the VuPAK workspace is recorded as a separate frame.
• Stop Recording—end recording and save the .avi file.
• Pause Recording—stop the recording while leaving the record active.
• Cancel Recording—stop recording and do not save the .avi file.
• Video Capture Properties—open the Video Capture Properties dialog box used to set
and adjust capture parameters. This dialog box is enabled before recording begins. For
more information on updating the properties, see Change the Recording Properties of an
AVI File.
Tip: Playing an *.avi movie on a monitor with different display settings than the recording
monitor(s) will cause some of the animation display to be lost.
Video Capture Properties

Use the Video Capture Properties dialog box to set and adjust video capture parameters.
This dialog box is enabled before recording begins. Once part of the movie is recorded, you
can continue to review the settings.


• Recording Mode—controls the number of frames that are captured during recording.
- Continuous—select for continuous recording mode like a camcorder. Every
manipulation to the VuPAK workspace is recorded as a separate frame. Select the
icon or menu item to end recording in this mode.
Tip: Some slowness will be experienced in Continuous mode. The delay is dependent on
the size of VuPAK window and it has nothing to do with the complexity of the scene.
- Intervals - Capture—select and enter the number of frames per second to capture
frames at regular intervals, instead of continuously. It differs from Continuous in that
not all activity is recorded.
- Snapshot—press to interactively capture a picture of the VuPAK workspace each
time the icon is selected or the letter C is pressed. This is similar to a camera.
Tip: You can start and stop recording an infinite number of times until the file is saved or
played back.
• Playback speed—select the number of frames per second to set how fast the movie be
played back using Microsoft Windows Media Player. The default is 1 frame per second.
• Compression rate—set how much to compress the images when saving to an *.avi file.
Better quality requires more disk space. The default is 75%. The larger the percentage
value, the more distorted the image.

• Defaults—click to use the system parameters.
Record an AVI File

Note: Only one movie can be recorded at a time. The VuPAK window size is automatically
fixed for each *.avi file.
Note: To set the capture parameters before recording, choose Tools > Video Capture >
Video Capture Properties. The Video Capture Properties opens. Change the
settings as needed and click OK.
To record an .avi file, follow these steps:

1. From the VuPAK menu, choose Tools > Video Capture > Record, or click the Record
icon on the Video Capture tool bar.
After you start record an *.avi file, you can interactively change the recording mode using
one of the following methods:
• To continuously record the VuPAK workspace click the Continuous Recording Mode
icon on the Video Capture tool bar.
The program enters automatic continuous recording mode where every manipulation
to the VuPAK workspace is recorded as a separate frame. Click the Stop Recording
icon to end recording in this mode. The Save As dialog box appears and can save
your *.avi file.
• To interactively capture a picture of the VuPAK workspace press C on your keyboard.
Each time you press C, a picture of the VuPAK workspace is recorded.
• To capture frames at regular intervals click the Intervals Recording Mode icon on
the Video Capture tool bar.
The program captures screen shots at the interval selected. This mode differs from
the continuous mode in that not all activity is recorded. Click Stop to end recording in
this mode.
Tip: The *.avi file requires that the window frames be same size. If the size of the VuPAK
window is changed during recording, a prompt will appear asking whether to rollback to
the original size or exit recording mode.
2. To stop recording and save the .avi file, click the Stop icon. The Save As dialog box
opens.
3. Either accept the default location (the folder for the active author) or navigate to the
location to save the file.
4. In File name, enter a unique name for the .avi file.
5. Click Save.

View an AVI File

Tip: Playing an *.avi movie on a monitor with different display settings than the recording
monitor(s) will cause some of the animation display to be lost.
To view an AVI file, follow these steps:

1. From the VuPAK menu, choose Tools > Video Capture > Play, or click the Play Saved
File icon on the Video Capture tool bar.
2. In the Windows Open dialog box, navigate to and select the AVI file and click Open.
The movie plays in a Windows Media Player window.
Change the Recording Properties of an AVI File

To change the recording properties of an AVI file, follow these steps:
1. From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Video Capture > Video Capture Properties. The
Video Capture Properties opens.
2. Set the capture parameters according to Video Capture Properties and click OK.

Animation
Animation
Note: A seismic volume must be loaded in order to use these features. To load a volume,
click Surveys > Load/Unload 3D Surveys Volume. Rotation about the X, Y, or Z-
axis does not require a seismic volume.
From the VuPAK window, choose Tools > Animation to display the menu that allows you to
quickly view volumes of seismic data using slice (inline, crossline, or time/depth), chair-cut,
volume, oblique cut, and oblique plane animations. The scanning bar may also be controlled.
A check () indicates which animation method is in current use.
Menu items include:
• Slice Animation inserts a single seismic display plane in the seismic volume parallel to the
X, Y, or Z-axis and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the plane. The user can select an inline, crossline, or time/depth slice.
• Chair-cut Animation inserts three seismic planes in the survey volume parallel to the X, Y,
and Z axes and automatically passes any one of the planes through the survey volume in
a direction perpendicular to the plane. The exterior faces of the volume remain displayed
until the slice passes through them.
• Volume Animation displays the seismic volume and automatically cuts through the
volume in one of the three axis directions (inline, crossline, time/depth slice). The exterior
faces of the volume remain displayed until the slice passes through them.
• Oblique Cut Animation inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in the seismic
volume and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the plane. The exterior faces of the volume remain displayed until the
slice passes through them.
• Oblique Plane Animation inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in the seismic
volume and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the oblique plane.
• Volume Slice Scanning Bar displays the scanning bar tool in the different animation
methods. A check () appears in the menu indicating this feature is in use. You can use
the scanning bar to move through the volume in the X, Y or Z direction. The bar is a white
column terminating with a cube that acts as a handle for manipulating the volume.
• Pin Active Volume locks the active SuperScope. The outline of the pinned SuperScope
changes from yellow to red. You can pin multiple SuperScope objects, allowing you to
resize only an active unpinned SuperScope. You cannot view the scanning bar when the
SuperScope is pinned.
• Lock Active Volume locks the active SuperScope dimensions while still allowing you to
move the SuperScope within the 3D seismic data. The outline of the pinned SuperScope
then changes from yellow to green. You cannot view the scanning bar when the
SuperScope is locked.
• Rotate View about Axis menu animates the VuPAK workspace about the X, Y, or Z-axes.
• Stop Animation is available once an animation is selected. This halts the animation. The
animation may also be stopped by clicking on the Pause icon from the Animation Toolbar.

Animation
• Stop Rotate is available once a rotation is selected. This halts the rotation. The rotation
may also be stopped by clicking on the X, Y, or Z rotation icon in use from the VuPAK
Utilities Toolbar; or use the ESC key on the keyboard.
Using the Volume Slice Scanning Bar

The white column of the scanning bar turns yellow when selected with the Pick mode (arrow
cursor). The direction the scanning bar can penetrate is dependent on the display mode and
the active face. To move through the volume as it is displayed, click the white column and
then drag the cylinder up and down, or left and right.
To increase or decrease the size of the scanning bar, click any of the white cubes and then
drag the cube up or out to increase the bar’s size. Drag the cube down or in to decrease the
bar’s size.
• Slice and Volume animation—the scanning bar can manipulate the volume in the
direction of the X, Y, or Z-axis. To change from a time/depth slice display to a vertical
seismic display, select Line (inline) or Trace (crossline) in the Change animation plane
field of the Animation Toolbar. To reverse the direction of the bar in Volume animation,
press R. The bar moves to the opposite face within the same axis.
• Chair-cut animation—the scanning bar can manipulate the volume in the direction of the
X, Y or Z axis. To change the orientation of the bar, double-click a different face of the
volume in the direction (X, Y or Z-axis) desired to view. To reverse the direction of the bar,
press R. The bar moves to the opposite face within the same axis.
• Oblique Cut and Oblique Plane animation—the scanning bar can manipulate the
volume in any direction. To reverse the direction of the bar in Oblique Cut animation, use
the R key on the keyboard. The bar moves to the opposite face within the same axis.
Slice Animation
Tools > Animation > Slice Animation
click Surveys > Display Seismic Object(s).
From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Animation > Slice Animation, or use the slice
animation icon in the Seismic Toolbar to obtain a slice similar to the one below. A check
() appears in the menu indicating this animation method is in current use.
Slice animation inserts a single seismic display plane in the seismic volume parallel to the X,
Y, or Z-axis and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the plane. You can select an inline, crossline, or time/depth slice.
Automatic movement
The Animation Toolbar is automatically displayed just below the VuPAK window title bar.
These tools can be used to automatically move the slice in different directions and at different
speeds.

Animation
Manual movement
To manually move a surface, click and drag that surface. The time/depth/inline/crossline
value is displayed in the status bar at the lower left of the VuPAK window.
To change the axis of the slice you want to animate, select Inline, Crossline, or Time in the
Change animation plane field of VuPAK Animation Toolbar.
You also have the option to display a manual scanning bar in the center of the slice. You can
use the scanning bar to manually move the chair-cut faces through the volume. The scanning
bar is a slim white cylinder with 6 white cubes.
To display or hide the scanning bar, click the display Settings icon in the Survey Cube
Toolbar and then click the VuPAK Preference tab and select the Scanning bar option.
In the Pick mode, the arrow cursor is used to manipulate the slice using the bar in the
volume.

Animation
To change the position of the slice, click on the white cylinder. When the cylinder is selected,
it turns yellow. Click and drag the cylinder up, down, left, or right to change which slice is
displayed. The time/depth/inline/crossline value is displayed in the status bar at the lower left
of the VuPAK window.
To change the size of the scanning bar, click on any of the white cubes. When a cube is
selected, all cubes turn yellow. Drag the bar up or out to increase the bar’s size; drag the
cube down or in to decrease the bar’s size.
Chair-cut Animation
Tools > Animation > Chair-cut Animation
Note: A seismic volume must be loaded to use these features. To load a volume, click
Surveys > Display Seismic Object(s).
From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Animation > Chair-cut Animation, or click the chair-
cut animation icon in the Seismic Toolbar to obtain a chair-cut similar to the one below.
Chair-cut animation inserts three seismic planes in the survey volume parallel to the X, Y, and
Z axes and allows movement of these planes through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the selected plane. The exterior faces of the volume remain displayed until
the slice passes through them.
Automatic movement
The Animation Toolbar is automatically displayed just below the VuPAK window title bar. You
can use these tools to automatically move through the chair-cut faces in different directions
and at different speeds.
Manual movement
To manually move a surface of the chair-cut, click and drag that surface. To reverse the
direction of the surface, press R on the keyboard. Press R again to switch back to the original
direction. The time/depth/inline/crossline value is displayed in the status bar at the lower left

Animation
In the Pick mode, use the arrow cursor to manipulate the chair-cut using the bar in the
volume.
To change the position of the chair-cut, click on the white cylinder. When you select the
cylinder, it turns yellow. Click and drag the cylinder up, down, left, or right to change the
location of the face of the chair-cut. The time/depth/inline/crossline value is displayed in the
status bar at the lower left of the VuPAK window.
To change which chair-cut face has the scanning bar, click on the surface you want or select
Inline, Crossline, or Time in the Change animation plane field of the VuPAK Animation
Toolbar.
To change the size of the scanning bar, click on any of the white cubes. When you select a
cube, all cubes turn yellow. Drag the bar up or out to increase the bar’s size; drag the cube
down or in to decrease the bar’s size.

Animation
To reverse the direction of the bar, press R. The bar moves to the opposite face within the
same axis. Press R again to restore the bar to its original direction.
Volume Animation
Tools > Animation > Volume Animation
click Surveys > Display Seismic Object(s).
From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Animation > Volume Animation, or use the volume
animation icon in the Seismic Toolbar to obtain a volume similar to the one below. A
check () indicates the animation method that is in current use.
Volume animation displays the seismic volume and automatically cuts through the volume in
one of the three axis directions (inline, crossline, time/depth slice). The exterior faces of the
volume remain displayed until the slice passes through them.
Automatic movement
The Animation Toolbar. is automatically displayed just below the VuPAK window title bar.
These tools can be used to automatically move through the volume in different directions and
at different speeds.
Manual movement
To manually move a surface of the survey volume, click and drag that surface. To reverse the
direction of the surface, press R on the keyboard. Press R again to switch back to the original
direction. The time/depth/inline/crossline value is displayed in the status bar at the lower left
To change the volume face for scanning bar, select Inline, Crossline, or Time in the Change
animation plane field of the VuPAK Animation Toolbar.

Animation
In Pick mode, the arrow cursor is used to manipulate the volume using the bar.
To change the position of the volume, click on the white cylinder. When the cylinder is
selected, it turns yellow. Click and drag the cylinder up, down, left, or right to change where
the volume is displayed. The time/depth/inline/crossline value is displayed in the status bar at
the lower left of the VuPAK window.
To change size of the scanning bar, click on any of the white cubes. When a cube is selected,
all cubes turn yellow. Drag the bar up or out to increase the size of the bar, and drag the cube
down or in to decrease the size of the bar.
To reverse the direction of the scanning bar, press R. The bar moves to the opposite face on
the same axis.

Animation
Oblique Cut Animation

click Display Seismic Object(s).
From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Animation > Oblique Cut Animation, or use the
oblique cut animation icon in the Seismic Toolbar to obtain a volume similar to the one
below. A check () appears in the menu indicating this animation method is in current use.
Oblique cut animation inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in the seismic volume
and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction perpendicular to the
plane. The exterior faces of the volume remain displayed until the slice passes through them.
Automated movement
Manual movement
A manual scanning bar is displayed in the center of the slice. This can be used to manually
move through the volume. The bar is the slim white cylinder with 6 white cubes.
Note: The scanning bar is always visible for oblique cut animations, even if this option is
turned off on the VuPAK Preferences tab of the VuPAK Display Settings dialog box.

Animation
In the Pick mode, the arrow cursor is used to manipulate the volume using the bar.
To change the position of the oblique cut, click on the white cylinder. When the cylinder is
the oblique cut is displayed. The bar can be moved in any direction.
selected, all cubes turn yellow. Drag the cube up or out to increase the bar’s size; drag the
To change the orientation of the oblique cut, click on one of the gray lines two white cubes. It
turns bronze. Click and drag the line to display any orientation of the volume.
To reverse the direction of the scanning bar, press R. The bar moves to the opposite face
within the same axis.

Animation
Oblique Plane Animation

click Surveys > Displaying seismic object(s).
From the VuPAK menu, click Tools > Animation > Oblique Pane Animation, or use the
oblique plane animation icon in the Seismic Toolbar to obtain a volume similar to the one
below. A check () appears in the menu indicating this animation method is in current use.
Oblique plane animation inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in the seismic
volume and automatically passes it through the survey volume in a direction perpendicular to
the plane.
Manual movement
A manual scanning bar is displayed in the center of the slice. This can be used to manually
move through the volume. The bar is the slim white cylinder with 6 white cubes.
Note: The scanning bar is always visible for oblique cut animations, even if this option is
turned off on the VuPAK Preferences tab of the VuPAK Display Settings dialog box.

Animation
In the Pick mode, the arrow cursor is used to manipulate the slice using the bar.
To change the position of the oblique cut, click on the white cylinder. When the cylinder is
the oblique cut is displayed. The bar can be moved in any direction.
selected, all cubes turn yellow. Drag the cube up or out to increase the bar’s size; drag the
To change the orientation of the oblique cut, click on one of the gray lines two white cubes. It
turns bronze. Click and drag the line to display any orientation of the volume.
Rotate View about Axis

Tools > Animation > Rotate View about Axis

Animation
The Rotate View about Axis menu animates the VuPAK workspace about the X, Y, or Z-
axes. Click any of the axes to begin the rotation. Click again to stop the rotation.
The ESC key on the keyboard also stops the rotation.
Menu items include:
• X rotates cube around a line parallel to the X-axis.
• Y rotates cube around a line parallel to the Y-axis.
• Z rotates cube around a line parallel to the Z-axis.

Material Editor
Material Editor
Note: A horizon, grid, fault, vertical seismic section or a time/depth slice must be displayed
in the VuPAK work space and the cursor must be in the Pick mode .in order to
open the Material Editor.
In the VuPAK window, right-click a displayed horizon, grid, fault, vertical seismic, or time/
depth slice display and select Change Transparency. The Material Editor dialog box opens.
The Material Editor displays the current color sphere on the left and the six material
properties on the right. See Material properties defined.
• To Edit Material properties, first select a property to edit by clicking Color or Edit beside
the desired property. Available properties include ambient color, diffuse color, specular
color, emissive color, shininess, and transparency.
The following options are available from the Material Editor menu:
• Edit
- Material Palette—opens the Material Palette for use when editing a material
property.
- Continuous—the selected object in the VuPAK workspace is automatically updated
as the color is modified.
- Manual—the selected object is updated the VuPAK workspace only after you click the
Accept button. A check mark () appears adjacent to the menu option when it is
active.
- Colors may also be copied to the clipboard and pasted from the clipboard.

Material Editor
• Options—Always on Top—specifies that the Material Editor dialog box will always be
displayed on top (in front of) other dialog boxes. A check mark () appears adjacent to
the menu option when it is active.
Edit Material properties

• Click Edit or Color beside the desired property to open a Material Property Color dialog
box for that specific property. Use this to change the color at the right side of the slider for
each of the properties selected. The color for all selected properties is changed
simultaneously to the same value. Only one of the properties can be selected for editing
at any given time.
• In the Material Editor select Edit > Material Palette to display available sphere colors.
With Edit or Color selected for any property, you can select a different sphere color for
that property.
Material properties defined

• Amb (ambient) bar light components come from all directions and are scattered with
equal intensity in all directions. As with diffuse, it is not affected by viewpoint. It is most
evident where the surface receives no direct light. Ambient light determines the overall
color of a surface. An example is a room well lighted by fluorescent bulbs.
• Diff (diffuse) bar light component comes from one direction. Once it hits a surface, it is
scattered with equal intensity in all directions. It is not affected by viewpoint, and is
brightest where the incident light strikes perpendicular to the surface. Diffuse light
determines the perception of the color of a surface. An example is a spotlight.
• Spec (specular) bar light component comes from a particular direction and tends to
reflect in a preferred direction, i.e., it appears hot. Thus, this light is affected by viewpoint.
It is brightest at the preferred direction angle. This light produces highlights on the surface
and is the major component of shininess. An example is the glint of light reflecting from a
car.
• Emis (emissive) bar light component is produced by an object.
Note: The Shininess and Transparency properties affect only the way light is reflected
or allowed to pass through an object.
• Shininess bar light component displays the degree of shininess of an object’s surface,
ranging from 0.0 for a diffuse surface with no shininess, to a maximum of 1.0 for a highly
polished surface. The default is 0.20.
• Transparency bar light component displays the degree of transparency of an object’s
surface, ranging from 0.0 for an opaque surface, to 1.0 for a completely transparent
surface. The default value is 0.0, completely opaque.
Material Palette
Note: A horizon, grid, fault, vertical seismic section or a time/depth slice must be displayed
in the VuPAK window and the cursor must be in the Pick mode .in order to open
the Material Editor window.

Material Editor
In the Material Editor select Edit > Material Palette.

The Material Palette displays available color spheres.
Click the desired color sphere to select it. A red box appears around the selected color
sphere and the name of the color sphere appears adjacent to Material Name.
The color of the selected color sphere is displayed in the left square of the Material Property
Color window and on the large sphere in the Material Editor window.
In the Material Property Color editor, edit the color as desired. The edited color will be used
as the 1.00 color value for the selected property in the Material Editor window.
The Material Palette dialog box contains the following menus:

• Edit
- Color—opens the Material Property Color Editor, which allows you to select a color
from the available color palette and vary its properties using the slider bars.
- Material—opens the Material Editor dialog box, which allows you to edit the six
material properties: ambient color, diffuse color, specular color, emissive color,
shininess, and transparency.
- Copy—copies the selected color to the clipboard.
- Help—displays the INVENTOR.HLP file (not currently implemented).
• Palette
- Basic—choose to make the Basic palette the active Material Palette. Currently, only
the Basic palette is available.
• Options
- Always on Top—specifies that the Material Editor dialog box will always be
displayed on top (in front of) other dialog boxes. A check mark () appears adjacent
to the menu option when it is active.

Material Editor
- Material Path—opens the Enter Material Path dialog box (shown immediately
below), which displays the path to the folder of the selected object.
Material Property Color Editor

Open the Material Property Color dialog box from the Material Palette: Edit > Color.
Select Sliders and display which color spectrum sliders to display.
Select a color from the available color palette and vary its properties using the slider bars.
The Material Property Color Editor contains the following menus:

• Edit

Material Editor
active.
- WYSIWYG—or what you see is what you get. This shows the color on the bar above
the slider pointer. Consider, for example, the R, G, and B sliders in WYSIWYG mode.
Put all three-slider pointers at 0.50. Gray will appear above each of the slider pointers
because (0.50, 0.50, 0.50) is gray. If the R slider is moved to 1.00 (a peach color), the
color beneath the other slider pointers is peach and that the slider backgrounds
change color accordingly. A check mark () appears adjacent to the option indicating
the WYSIWYG mode is in current use.
- Copy—copies the color in the left color square to the clipboard.
- Paste—copies the color on the clipboard to the left color square.
• Sliders—select which color model sliders to display. Then adjust the sliders to edit the
directional light.
• Options—Always on Top specifies that the Material Editor dialog box will always be

Stereo Mode With 3D Cursor

Tools > Stereo Mode With 3D Cursor
Select Tools > Stereo Mode With 3D Cursor to open the Stereo Preferences dialog box.
Stereo mode enables you to display 3D data stereoscopically. The stereo view you select
depends on your computer hardware and the special equipment you need to view the stereo
image, such as 3D glasses or a stereo projector.
The Stereo Preferences dialog box contains the following elements:
• Use Stereo—select and use the down arrow in the adjacent drop-down list to select a
type of stereo view. For more information about the supported stereo modes, see
Supported Stereo views.
Note: The Raw Stereo (OpenGL) stereo view requires a graphics card that supports
OpenGL stereo rendering. You must enable stereo display on the graphics card
and it is recommended that you install the latest OpenGL driver available for the
card.
The 3D cursor appears when Use Stereo is selected. The cursor reverts to 2D when you
deselect Use Stereo and exit stereo display mode.
• Stereo Adjustment—the following options allow you to adjust an object until it comes
into focus.
- Reverse left and right views—reverses what displays in the left and right eye.
- Zero parallax balance—adjusts whether the image appears in front of the screen,
level with the screen, or recessed behind the screen.
- Camera offset—adjusts the perceived depth of the overall image.
Note: The 3D cursor moves along the face of the selected object. When the cursor
is not on an object, it moves in a plane parallel to the screen while staying at
its current depth in the screen. Hold down A to move the 3D cursor forward or
toward the front of the viewing area. Hold down Z to move the cursor
backward or toward the back of the viewing area.When you move the cursor

up, down, left, or right with the mouse as usual, the cursor remains in the
same plane.
Supported Stereo views

Kingdom supports several basic methods for creating stereo views, and these methods are
available for selection in the Stereo Preferences dialog box:
• Raw stereo (OpenGL)
• Interlaced stereo (used by light polarizing systems)
• Half-Screen stereo
• Anaglyph stereo (Red/Cyan, Blue/Yellow, or Green/Magenta glasses)
• Sharp 3D LCD
Raw stereo (OpenGL)

The Raw Stereo (OpenGL) stereo view requires a graphics card that supports OpenGL
stereo rendering. You must enable stereo display on the graphics card and it is
recommended that you install the latest OpenGL driver available for the card. For more
information about other supported stereo views, see Supported Stereo views.
Interlaced stereo
Interlaced stereo views include the following choices:
• Horizontal Interlaced (Fast)
• Vertical Interlaced (Fast)
• Horizontal Interlaced (Best)
• Vertical Interlaced (Best)
Interlaced stereo images alternate either vertical or horizontal scanlines on the screen
between the left and right eye and require polarizing equipment such as special polarized
glasses or a stereo projector and polarized screen. This type of stereo display provides
comfortable viewing, but it has the drawback that thin vertical or horizontal lines in the image
may disappear or appear to only one eye depending on the orientation of the interlacing. The
two fast interlace modes do not compensate for this error. The two best interlaced modes,
while slower, compensate for this error by widening horizontal or vertical lines and thin
objects to make them visible to both eyes. For more information about other supported stereo
views, see Supported Stereo views.
Half-Screen stereo
Half-screen stereo views include the following choices:
• Horizontal Half Screen Filled
• Horizontal Half Screen
• Vertical Half Screen Filled
• Vertical Half Screen

Half-screen stereo displays the same image either side by side or one on top of the other. In
both cases, the image can be stretched to fill the available space. Half-screen stereo images
are intended for mirror glasses capable of showing half the screen to one eye and the other
half to the other eye. For more information about other supported stereo views, see
Anaglyph stereo
Anaglyph stereo views include the following choices:
• Red/Cyan Stereo
• Blue/Yellow Stereo
• Green/Magenta Stereo
Anaglyph stereo images rely on color filtering to create a stereo image. The view for one eye
uses one or two color channels plus the alpha channel. The the view for the second eye uses
the remaining color channels plus the alpha channel. Anaglyph stereo images require the use
of Red/Cyan, Blue/Yellow, or Green/Magenta glasses. For best results, all objects should be
in shades of Grey. Shapes with primarily red, green, or blue colors will appear in only one eye
and therefore look flat. For more information about other supported stereo views, see
Sharp 3D LCD
The Sharp 3D LCD is a color monitor that provides a stereoscopic display without the need
for special glasses. For more information about other supported stereo views, see Supported
Stereo views.

Crossplot
Crossplot
From the Kingdom software main window menu bar, choose Tools > Crossplot to specify a
new crossplot, open an existing crossplot file, or change the size of the symbols in a
displayed crossplot.
• New—click to open the Select Data dialog box.
• Open—click to open the Open Crossplot File dialog box in which you can navigate to
locate and select an existing crossplot file for display.
• Symbol Size—choose this option to display a submenu used to select a relative size for
the symbols in a currently displayed crossplot.
- Small—select to display the smallest size symbol in the currently displayed crossplot.
- Medium—select to display symbols in the crossplot that are intermediate in size to
Small and Big.
- Big—select to display the largest size symbol in the currently displayed crossplot.
Note: AVO attributes crossplotted in AVOPAK can be posted in VuPAK (Project >
VuPAK > Display Highlighted Crossplot Points).

Headlight Editor
Headlight Editor
Select Tools > Edit Headlights to open the Headlight Editor which allows you to adjust the
light color and intensity of the headlight source.
The Headlight Editor window can be used to illuminate the view from a different direction
and to change the color of the headlight.
.
The Headlight Editor window contains the following menus:

• Edit
- Color Editor—opens the Directional Light Color Editor window, which allows you to
select a color from the available color palette and to vary its properties using the
various slider bars.
- Copy—copies the selected color to the clipboard.
- Paste—pastes the selected color from the clipboard.
• Options
- Always on Top—specifies that the Material Editor dialog box will always be
displayed on top (in front of) other dialog boxes. A check mark () appears adjacent
to the menu option when it is active.
The Headlight Editor window contains the additional following element.
• Inten—use the slider bar to change the intensity value (brightness) for the headlight.
Enter (type) a value between 0 and 1.0 into the adjacent text field. A value of 1.0
produces the brightest or most intense color.

Headlight Editor
To change the direction from which the headlight emanates, place the cursor on the white
arrow. When the arrow is selected, it turns yellow. Click and drag the arrow around the
sphere to change the lighting and shading.
Tip: Move the light direction so that it is close to the object. Subtle dips and fracture patterns
may become evident, very much like viewing a landscape at dusk or dawn.
Directional Light Color Editor

Select Tools > Edit Headlights to open the Headlight Editor. In the Headlight Editor,
choose Edit > Color Editor to open the Directional Light Color dialog box, which allows
you to adjust the light color and intensity of the headlight source.
The Directional Light Color window contains the following menus.

• Edit
active.
- WYSIWYG—or what you see is what you get. This shows the color on the bar above
the slider pointer. Consider, for example, the R, G, and B sliders in WYSIWYG mode.
Put all three-slider pointers at 0.50. Gray will appear above each of the slider pointers
because (0.50, 0.50, 0.50) is gray. If the R slider is moved to 1.00 (a peach color), the
color beneath the other slider pointers is peach and that the slider backgrounds
change color accordingly. A check mark () appears adjacent to the option indicating
the WYSIWYG mode is in current use.
- Copy—copies the color in the left color square to the clipboard.
- Paste—copies the color on the clipboard to the left color square.
• Sliders—select which color model sliders to display. Then adjust the sliders to edit the
directional light.

Headlight Editor
• Options—Always on Top specifies that the Material Editor dialog box will always be
Sliders
Sliders are available for color editing from the following VuPAK options:
• Material Property Color Editor
• Directional Light Color Editor
The Sliders menu items allow you to specify the components of an RGB (Red, Green, Blue),
HSV (Hue, Saturation, Value), or combinations of these elements.
Only one of the menu items may be selected and those variables edited. A check mark ()
appears indicating which mode is in current use.
Menu items include:
• None removes the slider bar(s), eliminating the ability to vary the intensity of the selected
color.
• Value activates the V (luminance value) bar, which changes the intensity value or degree
of color change for the color selected in the left color square. Use the sliding bar to
change the color or simply enter a value between 0 and 1.0 using the keyboard.
• RGB activate the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) bars, which change the intensity of
each of the three colors. Use the sliding bar to change the color or simply enter a value
between 0 and 1.0 using the keyboard.
• HSV activates the H (hue), S (saturation), and V (luminance value) bars, which change
the intensity of each of the three color components. Use the sliding bar to change the
color or simply enter a value between 0 and 1.0 using the keyboard.
Note: A color determined by setting the Red, Green and Blue values can also be defined
by selecting the appropriate HSV parameters. RGB and HSV are simply two
different ways to define a color. The Hue setting chooses a color that will be acted
upon by the Saturation and Luminance Value settings. The color at the right side
of the slider range for S and V changes to the color selected as the Hue. The S
setting changes the intensity of only the selected color, while the V setting adjusts
the settings for the R, G, and B components simultaneously.
• RGB V activates the R (red), G (green), B (blue) and V (luminance value) bars, which
change the intensity of each of the three colors, as well as the luminance value. Use the
sliding bar to change the color or simply enter a value between 0 and 1.0 using the
keyboard. Notice that the V bar slider influences the three colors. As the V slider is moved
from 1.0 to 0.0 (White to Black), the R, G, and B bar sliders are also moved toward the
black (zero intensity) settings.
• RGB HSV activates all six color components. Since several of these are interdependent,
other components will change as the slider bar is moved. Use the sliding bar to change
the color or simply enter a value between 0 and 1.0 using the keyboard.

Headlight Editor

Open Inventor is a toolkit designed for use in 3D graphic applications. VuPAK incorporates
the following Open Inventor tools:
• The VuPAK Workspace (customized with Advanced Inventor Options)
• Material Editor—accessed by right-clicking horizon, grid, fault, vertical seismic, or time/
depth slice and choosing Change Transparency.
• Material Palette— in the Material Editor, select Edit > Material Palette.
• Material Property Color Editor—in the Material Palette, select Edit > Color.
• Headlight Editor—Tools > Edit Headlight
• Directional Light Color Editor—in the Headlight Editor, select Edit > Color Editor

Advanced Inventor Options

Use the Advanced Inventor Options menu to select various viewing functions. The tools are
displayed based on the selected object (i.e., horizons, faults, etc.) within the display.
To access the Advance Inventor Options menu, in the Pick (arrow) mode, or the View
(hand) mode, right-click in the empty VuPAK workspace or on an object to display the right
mouse button menu. Choose Advanced Inventor Options to display the following menu
items. A check () beside the option indicates that the option is on.
• Functions—tools to control rotation and position of the camera in the scene
• Draw Style—select how objects will be drawn during rendering. The As is style is
recommended. This is the default.
• Viewing—switch between the Pick (arrow) mode and the View (hand) mode. Press
the space bar to switch between the two modes.
• Decoration—show or hide the Decoration Toolbar.
• Fullscreen—maximize the VuPAK workspace using the entire monitor.
• Headlight—turn the headlight on and off. Headlight is the default lighting in VuPAK. To
see the full effect of the lighting models, turn off the headlight. Be sure to turn the
headlight back on before proceeding with VuPAK, unless preferable lighting options are
discovered.
• Preferences—provides options to point, clip, spin, and rotate the display.
Functions
Functions includes tools to control the rotation and position of the camera in the scene.
• Home—return the camera to its home position. This is the initial position if it has not been
reset.
• Set Home—reset the home position to the current camera position.
• View All—zoom out to bring all the objects back into view. This is useful when the scene
has been zoomed in so closely that the bearings may be lost. This feature returns to a
reasonable view of the objects.
• Seek—select a new center of rotation for the camera. When active and in View mode, the
cursor changes to a crosshair. Click the left mouse button on the object or position that is
to be the new center of rotation. After the button is released, the camera will automatically
rotate to a new position. From then on, the cube will rotate around this point when moved
in the View mode.
Draw Style
Draw Style provides multiple options for how objects will be drawn during rendering.
Note: The As is style is recommended. Occasionally it may be desired to change a drawing

style, but this is usually done for objects within a category (horizons, grids, etc.).

Sometimes changing the drawing style consequently changes the lighting model.
A check () appears indicating which drawing styles are active.

• As is—ignore the drawing style and lighting model nodes. This is the default.
• Hidden line—display all shapes in wireframe drawing style and change lighting to base
color. This style displays only the edges of front facing polygons. Back lines are hidden.
• No texture—render all shapes without texture.
• Low resolution—render all shapes with low resolution and no texture.
• Wireframe—display objects as a collection of lines connected as triangles, which
resembles a wire frame. This style displays all lines, as opposed to hidden line style.
• Points—display objects as points and change the lighting model to the base color.
• Bounding box—display only the bounding boxes for the displayed objects.
• Move same as still—display the objects using the same drawing style when in motion as
when the objects are still.
• Move no texture—display the objects in the view in the no texture drawing style when in
motion.
• Move hidden line—display the objects in the view in the hidden line drawing style when
in motion.
• Move low res—display the objects in the view with low resolution and no texture when in
motion.
• Move wireframe—display the objects in the view using the wireframe drawing style when
in motion.
• Move points—display the objects in the view using the points drawing style when in
motion.
• Move bounding box—display the objects in the view using the bounding box drawing
style when in motion.
• Single buffer—use only one buffer. As a result, the image flickers between redraws. This
option is not recommended.
• Double buffer—redraw in the back buffer and then swap buffers. This is the default
buffering mode and the only mode recommended for VuPAK.
• Interactive buffer—use double buffering only when using a special hardware/software
configuration. This option is not recommended.
Viewing
Switch between the Pick (arrow) mode and the View (hand) mode.
• Pick—select and manipulate objects within the VuPAK workspace. Use this mode to
access right mouse button menus and to digitize. The arrow cursor shape is the default.
When the Pick mode is selected and active, the View mode is deselected and inactive.

• View—move the camera in 3D space to zoom, rotate, and pan. A check () appears
adjacent to the menu item View mode is active.
Tip: Press the space bar to switch between Pick mode and View mode.
Preferences
Open the submenu containing options to point, clip, spin, and rotate the display. It also allows
for display in stereovision. The curser remains 2D by default. The 3D cursor will only display
when you open the Stereo Preferences dialog box by choosing Tools > Stereo Mode With
3D Cursor.
• Seek to point—move the camera toward a new center of rotation. This feature
intelligently selects a point to rotate around, instead of using the center of the cube. In
View mode, click Seek on the Decoration Toolbar and select a point on an object
(horizon, grid, seismic, etc.). The camera will zoom in towards the point and subsequent
rotations in the View mode will rotate around the new center of rotation.
• Auto clip planes—continuously adjust the far and near camera-clipping planes around
the scene’s bounding box to minimize clipping. The default is on. A check () appears
indicating Auto clip planes is active.
• Spin animation—automatically spin the view around the center of rotation. A check ()
appears indicating Spin animation is active. To make the view spin, select this option
while in the View mode, hold down the left mouse button on a point in the VuPAK
workspace, and move the cursor. Release the mouse button while still moving the mouse.
The cube will continue to rotate at the same speed and in the same direction as when the
mouse button was released. To stop rotation, click the view or press ESC. To disable
spinning, click the Spin animation option again.
• Rotation axes—display a three-color icon representing the principal axes at the center of
rotation.
• Stereo—render the scene for stereo viewing. Hardware, usually consisting of stereo
glasses and an emitter, are required to view in stereo vision.
• Full-scene anti-aliasing—blurs the edges of each object in the scene as it is rasterized
in a single pass making the scene smoother. This option is on by default.
• Record—opens the MPEG Recorder where you can specify the output file name and
location, frame rate, quality, and size for the output.mpg file. The recorder also includes
controls for record, pause, continue, and stop. This is a second option for recording. See
also Video Capture in VuPAK.

Change Color
Change Color
With a fault surface or well displayed in the VuPAK workspace, right-click on the fault or well
and select Change Color.
Use the Color dialog box to change the display color of the selected fault surface or well. A
single color, versus a color bar, applies to a fault surface or well.
- Click a color to select and then click OK.

Change Color

The right mouse button menus provide convenient and comprehensive access to most
options. The list of options in the right-mouse menu depends on where in the VuPAK
workspace you click.
Object Specific Options

Right click an object in your VuPAK work space to open the right-mouse button (RMB) menu
for that object:
Horizons Wells Seismic Sections
Faults Cross Sections Seismic Volumes
Grids Gather Crosslines
Note: Many of the right mouse button menu commands can also be accessed from the
VuPAK workspace main menu.
General Options
The following menus are available from a right-click anywhere in the VuPAK workspace:
Refresh Redraw the active VuPAK window.
View Settings Set the display options (projection, methods, and

background color) project annotation, font, and the line
and slice skip increments.
Rendering Strategy Set parameters for horizon and grid display that affect
rendering speed and resolution.
Set Active Surface for (From grids, seismic line, and seismic volume only)
Picking Designate which specific horizon, formation top, or fault to
interpret.
Horizon Management Edit the properties of, display, copy, and delete horizons
within the project. The horizons appear as planes through
the VuPAK workspace.
Fault Surface Management Create, display, edit the properties of, copy, and delete
fault surfaces within the project. The fault surfaces appear
as planes through the VuPAK workspace.
Stereo Preferences set preferences for displaying 3D data stereoscopically.

Advanced Inventor Options select the functions, drawing style, selection mode,
decoration tool bar, full screen, headlight, and Preferences
for the selected area or object.
General Display Options

The following options for displaying data can be set without any objects being displayed.
Most are also available from the object-specific menus:
Displaying seismic Load and unload multiple 3D seismic volumes from the
object(s) VuPAK workspace, and set the parameters for the
seismic volume and the display mode.
Select Vertical Display(s) Display VSDs in the VuPAK workspace. Select 2D lines,
inlines, crosslines, or digitize an arbitary line on the base
map.
Display All 2D Surveys in Display all active 2D surveys in the VuPAK workspace.
the VuPAK Working Set This option is only active if the 2D surveys have a data
type in the current VuPAK domain (time or depth).
Display [Object] Display the intersection of a horizon, grid, or fault as a line

Intersections Only on a vertical slice, rather than the entire horizon.
Display Unit Fill Model Display the current unit fill model in the VuPAK
workspace. No unit fill model will display if there are no
horizons or grids visible in VuPAK or if the Display a unit
fill model option on the Display tab of the VuPAK Unit Fill
dialog is not selected.
Digitize Cross Section Create a new cross section through wells in the VuPAK
Through Wells workspace.
Digitize Cross Section Create a new cross section through wells on the base
Through Wells on Base map.
Map
Unload All Vertical Sections Remove any vertical sections from the VuPAK
workspace. This option does not remove any wells from
Hide All Cross Sections Turn off the display of all cross sections and correlation
sections.
Set All [Objects] to Solid Display all horizons or grids in a solid color. The color is
Color based on the color defined on the Properties tab of the
Horizon or Grid Management dialog box.

Horizon RMB Menu
Horizon RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a horizon displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display the
horizon options.
Horizon horizon name The selected horizon’s name.
Display Inline inline number Click to display the inline number where the cursor is located
in a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Crossline crossline Click to display the crossline number where the cursor is
number located in a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Time Slice slice time Click to display the time or depth value where the cursor is
in milliseconds located in a base map and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Color Bar Display the color bar in the VuPAK workspace for the selected
horizon. Only one color bar can be displayed at any time. The
name of the horizon is displayed at the base of the
corresponding color bar.
Set to Solid Color Change the horizon to a solid color. You can change the
horizon back to the original colors by clearing the selection.
The color is based on the horizon color defined on the
Properties tab of the Horizon Management dialog box.
Material Editor Edit the six material properties for the selected horizon in the
Material Editor: ambient color, diffuse color, specular color,
emissive color, shininess, and transparency. A material
palette of colors may be activated.
Change Transparency Opens the Change transparency for horizons dialog box,
which includes a default option to apply the transparency
setting to all horizons currently displayed in VuPAK.
Opacity/Color Map Interactively set and adjust the opacity level and color of
seismic attributes within the volume.
Display Attributes Select display parameters for the horizon. Select a data type,
sampling increment, and vertical display factor. The option
also exists to apply these parameters to all VuPAK horizons
Drape Culture Drape any displayed culture layers on the selected surface.
The lines and text will fit to the x, y, and z values of the
surface.
You can also move the culture layer as a horizontal slice up
and down through the volume when it is initially displayed as a
horizontal slice. See Culture Menu for details.

Horizon RMB Menu
Drape Grid Drape a grid on a horizon. For example, you can drape an
attribute grid such as thickness on a horizon surface.
Flatten / Unflatten Flatten or unflatten the 3D workspace relative to a horizon or

grid. The interpreted object acts as the temporary datum.
Flattening is temporary and is not saved in the database.
Keyboard shortcut: Press U to unflatten the display.
Set as Active Surface for Designate this specific horizon for interpretation.
Picking
Cancel Active Surface for Deactivate the horizon. You can also press Esc to cancel the
Picking active surface.
Horizon: Picking Type Select a horizon picking type. This is available when the
horizon is the active surface
Horizon: Data Type Event Select which data type event to pick on. This is available when
the horizon is the active surface.
Horizon Picking Parameters Select the picking parameters for a selected data type.
Undo Use to unto multiple previous horizon picking and editing

changes (applies only to horizons)
Redo Use to redo multiple previous horizon picking and editing

Generate 7.5 Contours Generate contours using the Version 7.5 algorithm and
display the generated contours on the selected horizon. After
contours are generated for a horizon, this option is no longer
available on the horizon menu.
Unload Contours Remove the contour display for the selected horizon; this
option is active after contours have been loaded.
selected horizon.
Unload Remove the horizon from the VuPAK workspace and cancel
the selection of the horizon in the Project Tree.
See Right-Mouse Button Menus for options available from all displayed objects.

Fault RMB Menu
Fault RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a fault displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display the
following menu commands
Fault name The selected fault surface’s name.
Change Color Open the Color dialog box to change the display color of the
selected fault. A single color, versus a color bar, applies to a fault
surface.
Change Transparency Opens the Change transparency for faults dialog box, which
includes a default option to apply the transparency setting to all
faults currently displayed in VuPAK.
Drape Culture Drape any displayed culture layers on the selected surface. The
lines and text will fit to the x, y, and z values of the surface.
You can also move the culture layer as a horizontal slice up and
down through the volume when it is initially displayed as a
Set as Active Surface for Designate this specific fault for interpretation
Picking
Cancel Active Surface for Deactivate the fault. You can also press ESC to cancel the active
Picking surface.
Generate 7.5 Contours Automatically display contours on the selected fault.
Unload Contours Remove the contours displayed for the selected fault. This option
appears after contours have been loaded.
Surface Type Set the display type as point, mesh, filled, or segments for the
selected fault:
Assign Change the selected fault from an unassigned to the active

assigned fault. The fault will now be included in the active fault’s
triangulation, and both the Fault Line and Fault Surface may be
displayed, depending upon selections in Display tab of the Fault
Surface Management dialog box. You can also press A to assign
faults.
Unassign Change the selected fault from an assigned to an unassigned fault.

The fault will separate from the assigned fault triangulation, and
only the Fault Line will display (vs. the Fault Surface). You can also
press S to unassign faults.

Fault RMB Menu
Edit Alter digitized fault picks within the fault segments. This is only
available when the fault is the active surface, and the cursor is
placed on a fault segment. When the fault is the active surface, the
surface becomes semi-transparent, and the segments display as
solid lines. Click a fault segment to activate it and turn it orange.
Then, right-click Edit to create a slice where the fault segments
were picked. The highlighted squares indicate where the fault picks
are along the segments. These squares may be dragged and
dropped to new positions. The fault segment will whatever edits are
performed and update the surface accordingly. Press ESC to exit
Edit mode.
Edit in Vertical Display Displays the fault in a Vertical Seismic Display for editing.
Smooth (not available with the pre 8.6 fault system. See Fault System.)
Smooth single or multiple fault surfaces using the flex grid
algorithm.
Decimate (not available with the pre 8.6 fault system) If a fault has a very
large number of picks, decimating - or removing - picks from your
fault will improve performance.
Clipped By Lists all fault surfaces in the Working Directory. Select the
penetrating fault. The shortest segment will be clipped. (See Clip
Faults for more information.)
Unload Remove the fault from the VuPAK workspace and cancel the
selection of the fault in the Project Tree.

Grid RMB menu
Grid RMB menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a grid displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display the
following menu commands:
Grid name The selected grid’s name.
grid. Only one color bar can be displayed at any time. The
name of the grid is displayed at the base of the corresponding
color bar.
Material Editor Edit the six material properties: ambient color, diffuse color,
specular color, emissive color, shininess, and transparency. A
material palette of colors may be displayed.
Change Transparency Opens the Change transparency for grids dialog box. Both
include the default option to apply the transparency setting to
all grids currently displayed in VuPAK.
seismic attributes within the volume
Display Attributes Open the Display Attributes (Grid) dialog box, which
determines display parameters for the grid. Select a sampling
increment and vertical display factor. The option also exists to
apply these parameters to all VuPAK grids.
Drape Culture Drape any displayed culture layers on the selected surface.
The lines and text will fit to the x, y, and z values of the
surface.
You can also move the culture layer as a horizontal slice up
and down through the volume when it is initially displayed as a
Drape Grid Drape a secondary grid on a primary grid. For example, you
can drape an attribute grid such as thickness on a surface
grid.
Flatten / Unflatten Flatten or unflatten the 3D workspace relative to a horizon or

grid. The interpreted object acts as the temporary datum.
Flattening is temporary and is not saved in the database.
Keyboard shortcut: Press U to unflatten the display.
Generate 7.5 Contours Automatically display contours on the selected grid.
Unload Contours Remove the contours displayed for the selected grid. This
option appears after contours have been loaded.

Grid RMB menu
Surface Type Set the display type as Filled, Mesh, or Point for the selected
grid.
Unload Remove the grid from the VuPAK workspace and cancel the
selection of the grid in the Project Tree.

Well RMB Menu
Well RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a well displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display the
following menu commands:
Change Color Change the display color of the selected well. A single color,
versus a color bar, applies to a well.
Edit Open the Edit Well Data dialog box to adjust existing well data.
The dialog box is described in the Kingdom Geophysics and
Geology online help.
Display Options Change the display options of the selected well.
Hide Deselect the well in the VuPAK Project Tree and removes it from
Display Single Well Section For vertical wells, displays a cross section, and for deviated wells
displays a cross section that follows the borehole from the surface
location to the bottom hole location. For vertical wells, the cross
section width is fixed at 200 feet/meters if no survey data is
available. If survey data is available, the width of the cross section
is determined by calculating the distance between points A and B,
where A is the active survey’s minimum point (least line/trace
number) and B is the minimum point plus 3. For example, with
minimum point A of (5, 8), point B is (8, 14), with XY values for A
(2445027.55, 474750.03) and B (2445323.29, 475054.22). The
result is a width of 424, measured in world coordinates (usually
feet or meters).
Modify Digitized Cross Provides 2 options: Remove Well and Replace Well.
Section
Download IHS Well Reports Download a number of different well reports and graphs directly
from IHS.

Seismic Section RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a vertical section or time/depth slice displayed in the VuPAK
workspace to display the following menu commands (menu items change slightly depending
on the type of line displayed). The name of the Line/Slice is the first option in the Seismic
Section Right-mouse button menu.
Display Inline number Click to display the inline [number] where the cursor is located in a
vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Crossline Click to display the crossline number where the cursor is located in
number a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Slice number Click to display the time or depth value where the cursor is located
in a base map and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Nearest Gather Display the nearest gather to the selected trace location in an
AVOPAK Gallery.
seismic line/slice. Only one color bar can be displayed at any time.
The name of the seismic line/slice is displayed at the base of the
Material Editor Edit the six material properties: ambient color, diffuse color,
specular color, emissive color, shininess, and transparency. A
material palette of colors may be displayed.
Change Transparency For geologic cross sections, displays the Change transparency for
cross-sections dialog box. For seismic slices, opens the Change
transparency for seismic slices dialog box. Both include the default
option to apply the transparency setting to all cross-sections or
slices currently displayed in VuPAK.
Opacity/Color Map Interactively set and adjust the opacity level and color of seismic
attributes within the volume.
Data Type Select Data Type to display in the VuPAK workspace.
Data Type Coblending Blend two data types.
Scanning Bar Open the nonSuperScope scanning bar submenu.
Select Vertical Display Open one of the following dialog boxes based on the type of
element selected:
• Select Time Slice dialog box—select a time slice for display in
• Select Vertical Display dialog box—select an arbitrary line, inline,
or crossline for display in the VuPAK workspace.

Unload Remove the selected seismic line/slice from the VuPAK workspace
Unload with wells Remove the selected line/slice from the VuPAK workspace,
including any intersecting wells.
Fault: Digitize Digitize a fault. This option is available when a fault is the active
surface. The cursor changes to a crosshair with a D in the upper
right quadrant. Each mouse click produces a node for the active
fault, and the line between two nodes is a fault segment. A fault line
is a collection of one or more digitized fault segments. Double-click
to complete digitization. You can also press D to enter the Digitize
mode.
Horizon: Picking Type Control the horizon interpretation pick modes. This is available
when a horizon is the active surface. Horizon: Pick Phase—
control the horizon interpretation event phases. This is available
when a horizon is the active surface. The phases include:
Horizon: Data Type Event Select which data type event to pick on. This is available when the
horizon is the active surface.
Undo Use to unto multiple previous horizon picking and editing changes
(applies only to horizons)
Redo Use to redo multiple previous horizon picking and editing changes
(applies only to horizons)
Select Data Type

The Select Data Type dialog box displays available data types for a slice, line or cross
section displayed in the VuPAK volume. In the case of overlapping seismic surveys with the
same data type, seismic data is shown according to the survey order specified on the Order
tab in the Survey Management dialog box. Seismic data is not available for a selection unless
the survey is turned on in the VuPAK project tree. Also, Kingdom does not display seismic
data for any portion of a slice or line drawn outside the boundaries of available survey data.
To access the Select Data Type dialog box, load a slice, line, or cross section in the VuPAK
volume and then right-click the slice or line. Choose Data Type.
If the Apply to all vertical slices option is selected, only those slices that have the selected
data type are changed.

Scanning Bar
• Show—display the scanning bar on the line/slice in the VuPAK workspace. Use the
scanning bar to page through the single seismic lines/slices in the X, Y or Z direction. The
bar is a white cylinder terminating on each end with cones. These act as handles for
manipulating the line/slice. The direction the scanning bar can penetrate is dependant on
the display mode and the active face.
• Hide—remove the scanning bar from the VuPAK workspace.
• Set Position—redisplay the scanning bar at the current cursor position.
• Reset Size/Orientation—redisplay the scanning bar at its default size and position.
Figure 1 Scanning Bar on Single Slice
To pan through the lines/slices of the volume, click the white bar, turning
it yellow (as shown in the figure above), and then drag the bar up and
down, or left and right. Slice views can be moved back and forth but
cannot be resized directly.
To change the position of the seismic line/slice, place the Pick cursor on
the white bar. When the cylinder is selected, it turns yellow. Click and
drag the cylinder up, down, left, or right to change which line/slice is
displayed. The time/depth slice or inline/crossline/arbitrary line value is
displayed in the status bar at the lower left of the VuPAK window.

Cross Section RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a cross section displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display
the following menu commands. The Line/Slice name is the first option in the Cross Section
Right mouse button menu. This can be an inline, crossline, arbitrary line, or time/depth slice.
Display Inline number Click to display the inline [number] where the cursor is located in
a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Crossline number Click to display the crossline number where the cursor is located
in a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Slice number Click to display the time or depth value where the cursor is
located in a base map and the VuPAK workspace.
AVOPAK Gallery. For more information on the AVOPAK Gallery,
see the AVOPAK online help.
Change Transparency For geologic cross sections, displays the Change transparency
for cross-sections dialog box. For seismic slices, opens the
Change transparency for seismic slices dialog box. Both include
the default option to apply the transparency setting to all cross-
sections or slices currently displayed in VuPAK.
Data Type Select Data Type to display in the VuPAK workspace.
Data Type Coblending Blend two data types.
Scanning Bar Open the nonSuperScope scanning bar submenu
Reset Section Position Restores the section to its original position if it has been rotated
around a well.
Select Vertical Display open one of the following dialog boxes based on the type of
element selected:
• Select Time Slice dialog box—select a time slice for display in
• Select Vertical Display dialog box—select an arbitrary line,
inline, or crossline for display in the VuPAK workspace.
Unload Remove the selected seismic line/slice from the VuPAK

workspace.
Unload with wells Remove the selected line/slice from the VuPAK workspace,
including any intersecting wells.

Fault: Digitize Digitize a fault. This option is available when a fault is the active
surface. The cursor changes to a crosshair with a D in the upper
right quadrant. Each mouse click produces a node for the active
fault, and the line between two nodes is a fault segment. A fault
line is a collection of one or more digitized fault segments.
Double-click to complete digitization. You can also press D to
enter the Digitize mode.
when a horizon is the active surface. The phases include.
Horizon: Data Type Event Select which data type event to pick on. This is available when
the horizon is the active surface.
Horizon Picking Parameters Select the picking parameters for a selected data type.
Undo Use to unto multiple previous horizon picking and editing

Redo Use to redo multiple previous horizon picking and editing


Seismic Volume RMB Menu

In the Pick mode, right-click a seismic volume displayed in the VuPAK workspace to
display the following menu items. The name and data type of the selected seismic volume is
the first option in the right-mouse button menu.
Display Inline inline number Click to display the inline number where the cursor is located in a
vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
Display Crossline crossline Click to display the crossline number where the cursor is located in
number a vertical window and the VuPAK workspace.
AVOPAK Gallery. For more information on the AVOPAK Gallery,
see the AVOPAK online help.
Display Time Slice slice time Click to display the time or depth value where the cursor is located
in a base map and the VuPAK workspace.
Opacity/Color Map Interactively set and adjust the opacity level and color of seismic
attributes within the volume.
Select Data Type Select the data types used for automatically scrolling in the
animation mode. See Animate the VuPAK volume.
Data Type Coblending Interactively blend two types of data and view the changes in the
VuPAK workspace.
SuperScope subvolumes Open the SuperScope submenu to reset, select, save, rename, or
delete. The interpretation is constrained to the SuperScope.
Scanning Bar Open the nonSuperScope scanning bar submenu. The scanning
bar is available when in volume animation mode, but not in volume
rendering mode
Unload Remove the selected seismic volume from the VuPAK workspace.
Fault: Digitize Digitize the fault. This option is available when a fault is the active
surface and the volume is in animation mode. The cursor changes
to a crosshair with a D in the upper right quadrant. Each left mouse
click produces a node for the active fault, and the line between two
nodes is a fault segment. A fault line is a collection of one or more
digitized fault segments. Double-click to complete digitization. You
can also press D to enter the Digitize mode.
when a horizon is the active surface. The phases include:

Horizon: Data Type Event Select which data type event to pick on. This is available when the
horizon is the active surface.
Horizon Picking Parameters Select the picking parameters for a selected data type. This is
available when a horizon is the active surface.
Select Data Type

In the Select Data Type dialog box select the data types you want to automatically scroll
through when using the animation mode in the VuPAK workspace. For more information on
animating the VuPAK volume, see Animate the VuPAK volume.
Note: You can select bricked data only. If the Superscope contains non-bricked data, the
data type cannot be changed.
To change the data type, do the following:

1. In the Pick (arrow) mode, right click a volume within the VuPAK workspace.
2. Click Select Data Type from the menu.
The Select Data Type dialog box appears, listing all of the available bricked data types.
3. In Available Data Types, double-click a data type to move it to the Selected Data Types
list. You can also highlight the data type in Available Data Types and click > to move it to
Selected Data Types.
Those data types with an * next to the name are system predefined data types.

Note: To deselect a data type, double-click the data type in Selected Data Types to
move it back to Available Data Types, or highlight the data type and click <.
Deselect all data types to not automatically scroll.
4. Click Apply after you have selected all the data types.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Data Type Coblending

Use the Data Type Coblending dialog box to interactively blend two data types and view the
changes in the VuPAK workspace. You can coblend the following items:
• time/depth slices; See Gather Crossline RMB Menu.
• attributes for a bricked volume.

• File menu—select the following commands to use and save coblended settings. These
can apply to any data types selected.
- Load—choose to load a previously saved coblended settings.
- Save—choose to save the coblended settings as a .dcf file.
• Primary Data Type—select the primary data type.

- Color bar—click to access the Color Editor dialog box to change the colors in
the color bar. Click OK to save the changes.
- Primary Data Blend Percentage—slide the bar to set the amount that the primary
data contributes to the blend.
• Secondary Data Type—select the secondary data type.
- Color bar—click to access the Color Editor dialog box to change the colors in
the color bar. Click OK to save the changes.
- Secondary Data Blend Percentage—slide the bar to set the amount that the
secondary data contributes to the blend.
• Complimentary Mode—select to make the total blend percentage equal to 100 when
sliding the Data Blend Percentage bar. To set each percentage manually, uncheck this
box.

Gather Crossline RMB Menu
Gather Crossline RMB Menu

In the Pick (arrow) mode, right-click a gather displayed in the VuPAK workspace to display
the following options:
• Gather Crossline: Bin Location: Line ## Trace ##—the selected gather’s location.
Reverse Gather Reserves the order in which the gathers are displayed.
Color Bar Editor Select the color bar for the gathers.
gather. Only one color bar can be displayed at any time. The
location of the gather is displayed at the base of the
Material Editor Select a sampling increment and vertical display factor. The
option also exists to apply these parameters to all VuPAK
grids.
seismic attributes within the volume.
Seismic Data Type Select Data Type to display in the VuPAK workspace.
Scanning Bar Open the nonSuperScope scanning bar submenu
Select Vertical Open the Select Vertical Display dialog box to digitize a new
Display(s) line on an active base map. For more information, see the
topic Select Line from Seismic in the Kingdom Geophysics
and Geology online help.
Unload Deselect the selected fault on the VuPAK Project Tree and
remove the fault the VuPAK workspace.

Color
Color
Use the Color dialog box to change the display color of the selected fault surface or well. A
single color, versus a color bar, applies to a fault surface or well.
Click a color to select and then click OK.

VuPAK Toolbars
The following tool bars are specific to VuPAK:
Survey Cube
Seismic
Viewing
Utilities
Animation
Video Capture
Formation Top Picking
Faults Picking
Horizons Picking
Project Status
The Decoration Toolbar is an Advanced Inventor Option tool bar displayed in the right margin
of the VuPAK workspace; it contains the OpenInventor icons.
Survey Cube Toolbar

Use the Survey Cube tool bar to select the viewing area and control parameters for the
display cube.
.
Note: This tool bar can be docked or undocked.
The following table describes the Survey Cube tool bar icons.
Survey Cube Toolbar Icons
Select Viewing Area Opens the Selecting the VuPAK viewing area
dialog box used to define the areal extent
(including which surveys to display) and the
vertical bounds of the viewing area within the
VuPAK workspace

Survey Cube Toolbar Icons
Define Time/Depth Range for Opens the Defining project time/depth range
the Entire View dialog box used to define the start and end time
(or depth) for the viewing area within the VuPAK
workspace
Display Settings Opens the Change VuPAK Display Settings

dialog box used to set the project annotation,
font, display options (projection, methods, and
background color), and the line and slice skip
increments
Application Settings Opens the Application settings dialog box used

to set the Project cube annotation settings and
Survey annotation settings display parameters
Turn On and Off Annotations Turns on or off the annotations.
Show Color Bar Opens the color bar and displays it to the right of
the active window
Abort Terminates the ongoing background operation
Color Fill Model Settings Opens the Color Fill dialog box to create, edit,
delete, and select color fill models.
Turn Lithology On/Off Toggle the display of the selected color fill model
on or off.

Seismic Toolbar
Use the Seismic tool bar to load and unload seismic survey volumes, control the volume
animation method, and display seismic and log data in the VuPAK workspace cube.
The table below describes the Seismic tool bar icons.
Seismic Toolbar Icons
Icon Icon Name Explanation of Function
Select a Seismic Line Opens the Select Vertical Display dialog box used to
select an arbitrary line, inline, or cross-line for display
in the VuPAK workspace
Select a Slice Opens the Select Time Slice dialog box used to select
a time or depth slice for display in the VuPAK
workspace. Click List Data to display data information
on selected surveys.
Display Seismic Opens the Display Seismic Object(s) dialog box used
Object(s) to load and unload multiple 3D seismic volumes from
Manipulate Opacity/ Opens the Opacity/Color Map dialog box used to load
Color Maps an existing opacity or color map for the volume or
interactively specify a custom opacity color map.
Slice Animation Inserts a single seismic display plane in the seismic

volume parallel to the X, Y, or Z-axis, and
automatically passes it through the survey volume in
a direction perpendicular to the plane. You can select
an inline, crossline, or time/depth slice.
Volume Animation Displays the seismic volume and automatically cuts

through the volume in one of the three axis directions
(inline, crossline, time/depth slice). The exterior faces
of the volume remain displayed until the slice passes
through them.

Seismic Toolbar Icons
Chair-cut Animation Inserts three seismic planes in the display parallel to

the three axes and automatically passes any one of
the planes through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the plane. The exterior faces of the
volume remain displayed until the slice passes
through them.
Oblique Cut Inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in

Animation the seismic volume and automatically passes it
through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the plane. The exterior faces of the
volume remain displayed until the slice passes
through them.
Oblique Plane Inserts a seismic display plane in any orientation in

Animation the seismic volume and automatically passes it
through the survey volume in a direction
perpendicular to the oblique plane.
Surface Attribute Opens the Surface Attribute Scanning dialog box

Scanning used to paint seismic information along a horizon,
fault, or grid surface within the VuPAK workspace.
Display Seismic Turns on or off all loaded seismic volumes. A prompt

Volume is displayed if no volumes have been loaded.
Pin Active Volume Locks the active SuperScope. The outline of the
pinned SuperScope then changes from yellow to red.
Multiple SuperScope objects can be pinned, allowing
you to resize only an active unpinned SuperScope.
Scanning bar cannot be viewed when object is
pinned.
Lock and Move Locks the active SuperScope dimensions while still
Active Volume allowing the ability to move the SuperScope within the
3D seismic data. The outline of the pinned
SuperScope then changes from yellow to green.
Scanning bar cannot be viewed when object is
locked.
Select Logs to Opens the Select Logs dialog box used to display a
Display well and its corresponding logs. Logs can be mapped
to tracks, colors can be selected, and the values can
be set. The shading values can also be set for the
selected log curve.

VuPAK - Viewing Toolbar
Use the Viewing tool bar to set the view and orientation of the VuPAK workspace. You can
also zoom the VuPAK workspace in and out.
The table below describes the Viewing tool bar icons.
Reset View Resets the scene to the default values
Reset Orientation Resets the display to the default position, without

altering the displayed objects
Show Top View Shows the top side of the survey cube
Zoom In Enlarges the view. For more information, see VuPAK

Toolbars.
Zoom Out Decreases the size of the defined section of the display
by returning it to its previous scale.
StretchXY Stretches the image in the X and Y directions

simultaneously. Stretch increments set in VuPAK
Preferences (Project > VuPAK Preferences).
Reset StretchXY Resets the image in the X and Y directions; enabled

after the StretchXY stretch has been applied
StretchX Stretches the image in the X direction. Stretch

increments set in VuPAK Preferences (Project >
VuPAK Preferences)
Reset StretchX Resets the image in the X direction; enabled after the
StretchX stretch has been applied

StretchY Stretches the image in the Y direction. Stretch

VuPAK Preferences).
Reset StretchY Resets the image to the Y direction; enabled after the
StretchY stretch has been applied
StretchZ Stretches the image in the Z direction. Stretch

VuPAK Preferences).
Reset StretchZ Resets the image in the Z direction; enabled after the
StretchZ stretch has been applied

Utilities Toolbar
The Utilities tool bar rotates the VuPAK workspace around the X, Y, or Z-axes.
The table describes the Utilities tool bar icons.

Utilities Toolbar Icons
Animate View from X-Axis Rotates the VuPAK workspace around the X-
axis. Click the icon again to stop the rotation.
Animate View from Y-Axis Rotates the VuPAK workspace around the Y-
axis. Click the icon again to stop the rotation
Animate View from Z-Axis Rotates the VuPAK workspace around the Z-
axis. Click the icon again to stop the rotation
Animation Toolbar
View > Toolbars > Animation
In a VuPAK main window, the Animation tool bar provides options to control animation in the
active VuPAK display window. The Animation tool bar applies only to 3D seismic volumes. To
adjust increments for vertical seismic displays, see Traces tab.
The icons on the Animation tool bar in a VuPAK window are shown below.
Note: The Animation tool bar cannot be moved or undocked.
The table below describes the Animation tool bar icons.

Animation Toolbar Icons
Animation Type Select the animation type to be used

when more than one type of data has
been selected:
• Scroll—cycle through either the
inline, crossline, and time in the
animation plane
• Data—cycle through the data
selected
• Both—cycle one time through the
data types in the order selected and
then scroll to the next display and
cycle through the data types
For more information, see
Automatically Change Data Types
Within Scope During Animation in the
VuPAK online help.
Scrolling Increment Allows you to select from the pull-

down menu a numerical value to set
the increment for viewing vertical
displays and slices within the VuPAK
workspace.
Next Seed Line option can also be
selected from the pull-down menu.
Values will depend on the slice type
currently selected (Inline, Crossline or
Time Slice). By selecting the Next
Seed Line option you can use the
animation tool to scroll through the
data, stopping at each line in turn.
Interactive Forward Advances the animation by one frame.
Forward Once Animates forward through the active

portion of the seismic volume one
time, showing each inline, crossline,
or slice.
Forward Animates front to back through the

seismic volume continuously. Click the
Pause icon to stop the cycle.

Oscillating Moves forward then backward through

the animation cycle continuously. Click
the Pause icon to stop the cycle.
Backward Animates back to front through the

seismic volume continuously. Click the
Pause icon to stop the cycle.
Backward Once Animates back to front through the

active portion of the seismic volume
one time, showing each inline,
crossline, or slice.
Interactive Moves backward through the

Backward animation by one frame.
Pause Halts the animation
Frame Uses the slider bar to manually move

to any frame in the animation. Moves
the small black triangles to set the Clip
Range of the Inline, Crossline, or Time
interval over which the animation
operation moves or oscillate.
During animation, the slider bar

pointer moves to show the Inline,
Crossline, or Time position during an
animation operation.
Change Animation Selects the direction (plane) of

Plane animation:
• Time—time slices
• Depth—depth slices (available
only if a depth volume has been
loaded)
• Line—inlines
• Trace—crosslines

Slice Position Displays the number of the Line or

Trace, or the value of the Time or
Depth at which the animation slice is
located during an animation operation.
You can type a number or value in the
Slice Position Display box, and press
Enter to move the slice to a specific
location.
Set Clip Range Sets the click range:
• Active—constrains animation to
the active SuperScope
• Reset—sets the clip range back to
the full available range
Speed Uses the slider bar to manually

increase or decrease the speed of the
animation operation. Animation
speeds are relative and depend on the
volume of data being animated and
the capabilities of individual computing
systems.
Refreshes the Recalculates all animation frames

Current View
Exit Animation Exits animation mode. Seismic data is

unloaded and the animation tool bar
disappears.

Video Capture Toolbar
View > Toolbars
The Video Capture tool bar is automatically displayed when the VuPAK workspace is active,
or you can turn it on or off by selecting View > Toolbars and checking on or off Video
Capture. option
Choose Tools > Video Capture > Play or click the Play icon on the Video Capture tool bar
to play a saved *.avi file. A saved *.avi file may also be opened in a Windows Media Player or
Microsoft Power Point outside of Kingdom.
The table below describes the Video Capture tool bar icons.
Video Capture Toolbar Icons
Play Saved File Opens a standard Windows Open dialog box

where you can select an AVI file. Once selected,
the AVI file opens in a new Windows Media
Player window.
Stop Recording Pauses the recording and opens a standard

Windows Save dialog box. You can save the
video as an .avi file.
Record Begins recording the VuPAK view.
Pause Pauses the recording.

Recording
Cancel Immediately cancels the recording without

Recording AVI allowing you to save it.
Continuous Continuously records the VuPAK window. A

Record Mode frame is captured each time the view changes.

Video Capture Toolbar Icons
Intervals Records on a timer interval (frames per second)

Recording Mode you select in the Video Capture Properties
dialog box.
Snapshot Captures individual frame each time you press

Recording Mode the C key.
Recorded Shows the number of recorded frames.

Frames
Available Disk Shows the available disk space in Gigabytes.

Space
Survey Select the survey to change the survey within

Selection the scope. This option is only available when
you select bricked data on the Display Seismic
Object(s) dialog box.
Volume Select a data type to change the data type within

Selection the scope

Decoration Toolbar
The Decoration tool bar appears on the right margin of the VuPAK workspace and provides
additional means to set the view and orientation of the VuPAK workspace. The icons on this
tool bar are also known as OpenInventor icons.
The table below describes the Decoration tool bar icons.

Decoration Toolbar Icons
Select Pick and manipulate objects within the VuPAK workspace.

The default cursor shape is an arrow. This is also known as
the Pick mode.
Rotate Rotate and translate the VuPAK volume. For more

information, see Rotate the VuPAK Volume and Translate the
VuPAK Volume. This is also known as the Hand mode.
? Not currently implemented by OpenInventor.
Home View Return the VuPAK view to its home position. This is the initial
position if it has not been reset.
Set Home Reset the home position of the VuPAK volume to the current
position.
View All Zoom out to bring all the VuPAK volume back into view. This is
useful when the scene has been zoomed in so closely that the
bearings may be lost.
Set Focus Make a point the new center of rotation for the VuPAK cube.
you must first switch to Rotate (or Hand) mode. Then click on
an object to be the focus of rotation (still in Rotate mode).
Then when you rotate, the center of focus will be the point you
clicked on the selected object.
Projection Specify the view as either Perspective or Parallel.
Note: When Pick (arrow) mode is selected and active, View (hand) mode is
deselected and inactive.
Tip: Use the space bar on the keyboard to switch between the Pick (arrow) mode and the
View (hand) mode.

Thumbwheel Controls
The Thumbwheel controls at the bottom of the VuPAK workspace allow you to adjust the
position of the VuPAK cube in the workspace.
The thumbwheels use a local reference coordinate system, which is a rotated version of the
arbitrary line coordinate system. The origin of the coordinate system is the upper left corner
of the VuPAK cube at which point Trace, Line, and Time are all equal to zero.
Tip: To undo editing and return the scene to its original defaults, click the Reset View icon.
Controls include:
• RotateX—rotate the display about the X axis. Click the wheel and drag it in the up
direction to rotate towards the viewer. Click on the wheel and drag it in the down direction
to rotate away from the viewer.
• RotateY—rotate the display about the Y axis. Click the wheel and drag it to the left to
rotate in a clockwise direction. Click the wheel and drag it to the right to rotate in a counter
clockwise direction.
• Zoom—increase or decrease the size of the display when you are in the Parallel view.
Click the wheel and drag it in the up direction to zoom out. Click the wheel and drag it in
the down direction to zoom in.
• Dolly—increase or decrease the size of the display when you are in the Perspective view.
Click the wheel and drag it in the up direction to zoom out. Click the wheel and drag it in
the down direction to zoom in.
The Zoom slider and field are only available in the perspective projection. This adjusts
the camera’s field of view. The field of view is specified in degrees next to the slider. Click
n the slider and drag it to the left to decrease the field of view. Click the slider and drag it
to the right to increase the field of view, or enter a value in the zoom field using the
keyboard, and then press Enter.
Use Toolbars
This section covers the basic procedures for using tool bars:
Display a Toolbar From the View Menu

Close a Toolbar
Undock a Toolbar
Dock a Toolbar
Display a Toolbar From the View Menu

View > Toolbars
To display a tool bar, follow these steps:
1. With the VuPAK workspace active, choose View > Toolbars.
The VuPAK Toolbars dialog box opens.
2. Click in the check box adjacent to a tool bar name to display that tool bar. A check mark
() indicates the tool bar is active and displayed.
Note: To display the Decoration tool bar, right-click in the VuPAK workspace and choose
Advanced Inventor Options > Decoration. The Decoration tool bar appears.
You can hide the Decoration tool bar by right-clicking in the VuPAK work space
and deselecting Advanced Inventor Options > Decoration.
Close a Toolbar
View > Toolbars
To close a tool bar, use one of the following options:
• Click the [x] button in the upper right corner of the tool bar.
• To remove VuPAK tool bars, choose View > Toolbars to open the VuPAK Toolbars
dialog box. Uncheck the tool bar and click Close.

• To remove the Decoration tool bar and Thumbwheel controls, right-click any object or
area, and then choose Advanced Inventor Options > Decoration. The check
disappears and Decoration tool bar and the thumbwheel controls are hidden.
Undock a Toolbar
To undock the tool bar, follow these steps:
1. Click the tool bar in an area that is not on an icon and hold down the left mouse button.
The tool bar is outlined in black.
2. Continue to hold down the left mouse button and drag the tool bar into the VuPAK window
or another desired area.
3. Release the mouse button.
Undocked tool bars can be moved outside the vertical window where the size of the tool bar
can be manually adjusted.
Dock a Toolbar
To dock the tool bar, follow these steps:
1. Click the tool bar in an area that is not on an icon and hold down the left mouse button.
2. Continue to hold down the left mouse button and drag the tool bar until it touches another
tool bar.
3. Release the mouse button.


Vu PAK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vu PAK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Vu PAK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Energy Upstream

1401 Enclave Pkwy Ste 500

2017 Confidential iii

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. v

vi © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. vii

viii © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Right-Mouse Button Menus

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. ix

x © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

View Modify VuPAK display settings, zoom, control orientation,

Culture Manage and display culture data.

Wells Select, query, and edit wells.

Logs Select and scale logs.

Tops Manage, activate, and edit formation tops.

Grids Manage and display attributes for grids.

Contours Manage contours.

2 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Working with cross sections

Working with unit fill models

Using control points in the 3D workspace

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 3

4 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Creating and displaying cross sections

Creating cross sections from the base map

Creating well-to-well cross sections in 3D space

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 5

Selecting cross sections as a data type

Displaying cross sections from vertical display windows

Correlation sections display as cross sections in 3D based on true distance spacing.

6 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

A correlation section by line on the The correlation section displays as a

If you want to synchronize 2D and 3D displays of cross sections go to theVuPAK Preferences

Displaying surface intersections only

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 7

Changing cross section transparency

8 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Moving cross sections in 3D space

Rotating cross sections around a well

Moving cross sections along the scanning bar

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 9

10 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 11

12 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 13

14 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

6 Views Select which views to display the points sets (VuPAK,

7 Selection Mode Turn on and off manual selection mode.

8 Calculate Subset Available calculations include best fit plane, bounding

9 2D Crossplot The 2D Crossplot plots any 2 attributes, loaded or

10 Histogram Create a histogram for any point set, subset, or

11 Refresh Working Sets Refresh the wells, horizons, and surveys.

12 Display Options Select highlight color; crossplot background; VSD

13 Minimize Minimize the Microseismic window to display the Mini

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 15

14 Help. Open the Microseismic Help file.

16 © 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved.

Loading point sets

© 2017 IHS Markit. All Rights Reserved. 17